Prisma P Catalogue
Prisma P Catalogue
Prisma P Catalogue
Prisma P
Cubicles up to 4000 A
Catalogue 2013
Presentation
A dependable electrical installation The total compatibility of Schneider Electric devices with the Prisma P system is a key advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability. System design has been validated by type tests as per standards IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-2 and benefits from the combined experience of Schneider Electric customers over many years. An upgradeable electrical installation Thanks to modular design, Prisma P switchboards can be modified easily to integrate new functions as needed. Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and straight-forward due to easy access to devices. Total safety for personnel Work in a Prisma P switchboard is risk-free when carried out by qualified persons in compliance with all applicable safety regulations. Devices are installed behind protective front plates and only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal separations protect against direct contact with live parts. Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NSX and Compact INS/ INV devices in Prisma P enclosures.
24
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00100
Presentation
b Applications: v indoor cubicles for main or subdistribution low-voltage switchboards for commercial and industrial applications v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back b In (A): 4000 A b Degree of protection: v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket v IP55: with IP55 cover panels b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts: v IK07 with cover frame v IK08 (with IP30 door) v IK10 with IP55 door b Framework dimensions: v four widths: -- W = 300: cable compartment -- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment -- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment -- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment v two depths: 400, 600 mm v height: 2000 mm.
PD390180_SE.eps
400E00100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
25
Presentation
The Prisma P functional system can be used for all types of low-voltage distribution switchboards (main, subdistribution and final) up to 4000 A, in commercial and industrial environments. Switchboard design is very simple. A metal structure The switchboard is made up of one or more frameworks combined side-by-side or back-to-back, on which a complete selection of cover panels and doors can be mounted. A distribution system Horizontal busbars or vertical busbars positioned in a lateral compartment or at the rear of the cubicle are used to distribute electricity throughout the switchboard. Complete functional units Each device is part of a functional unit comprising: b a dedicated mounting plate for device installation b a front plate to block direct access to live parts b prefabricated busbar connections b devices for on-site connections. Each functional unit contributes to a function in the switchboard. The functional units are modular and are arranged rationally, one on top of another, within the enclosure. The system includes everything required for functional unit mounting, supply and onsite connection. The components of the Prisma P and those of the functional units in particular have been designed and tested taking into account device characteristics. This design approach ensures a high degree of reliability in system operation and optimum safety for personnel.
PD390150_SE_R.eps
26
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E10020
Presentation
Prisma P enclosures
PD390381_SE.eps
b Steel sheet metal b Electrophoresis treatment + hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder, white colour RAL 9001 b Can be dismantled b Can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back b Degree of protection: v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket v IP55: with IP55 cover panels b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts: v IK07: with cover frame v IK08: with IP30 door v IK10: with IP55 door b Framework dimensions: v four widths: - W = 300: cable compartment - W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment - W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment - W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment v two depths: 400, 600 mm v height: 2000 mm b Indoor cubicles.
A dependable electrical installation The total compatibility of Schneider Electric devices with the Prisma P is a key advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability. System design has been validated by type tests as per standards IEC 61439-1 and 2 and benefits from the combined experience of Schneider Electric customers over many years. An upgradeable electrical installation Thanks to modular design, Prisma P switchboards can be modified easily to integrate new functional units as needed. Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and straight-forward due to easy access to devices. Total safety for personnel Work in a switchboard must be carried out by authorised persons in compliance with all applicable safety regulations. To increase the safety of personnel, devices are installed behind protective front plates; only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal protection (partitions, barriers) is available to create form 2, 3 or 4 separation to protect against direct contacts with live parts. Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NSX and INS/INV devices in Prisma P enclosures. Electrical switchboards built using the Prisma P functional system and Schneider recommendations fully comply with international standards IEC61439-1 and 2.
Electrical characteristics
Use of the components in the Prisma P functional system ensures the creation of switchboards complying with standards IEC 50298, EN 50298, IEC 61439-1 and 2, EN 61439-1 and 2, as well as local versions with the following electrical characteristics: b rated insulation level of main busbars: 1000 V b InA (A): 3250 A b rated peak withstand current Ipk: 220 k b rated short-time withstand current Icw: 100 kA rms / 1 second b frequency: 50/60 Hz. 16/04/2013 27
400E10020
Version : 3.0
Presentation
Prisma PH
PD391268b_SE.eps PD391264b_SE.eps
Prisma PH
Catalogue 2010
28
Version : 1.0
16/04/2013
400E10060
Presentation
To know more b See the solution guide Solutions for Continuity of Service in Prisma electrical installations (COM-POWER-LVIS01EN). 400E10070 Version : 1.0 16/04/2013 29
Presentation
Incomer
Compact NS1000 4P Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply via cables
Distribution
Linergy LGY busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection
Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Linergy FC distribution block Connection Direct via cables Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Linergy FM 80 A Linergy FM 200 A Linergy FH Cable running Connection Cable straps Trunking Linergy TA in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices Cable compartment
PD391172_SE_R.eps PD390382_SE_R.eps
PD391298_SE_R.eps
30
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E10040
Presentation
PD391299.eps
PD390385_SE_R.eps
PD391300_SE_R.eps
400E10040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
31
Presentation
Incomer
Compact NSX630 4P Fixed, front connection Motor mechanism Direct supply via cables
Distribution
Linergy BW busbars
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply 80 A Linergy FM 200 A Linergy FM Linergy FH comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Connection Linergy TA/TB + earth bar TA/TB at bottom of the switchboard
Enclosure
Cubicle, W = 650 mm, D = 400 mm
PB104999.eps
PB104998.eps
32
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
PD390563_SE_R.eps
400E10040
Presentation
400E10040
PD390394_SE_R.eps
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
33
Presentation
Incomer
Compact NS1000 4P Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy LGY busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block at bottom of cubicle Motor protection devices Supply Comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm
PD390399.eps
Enclosure
PD390398_SE_R.eps
34
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E10040
Presentation
Incomer
Masterpact NT1000 3P Drawout, front connection Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy LGY busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply 80 A Linergy FM Linergy FH comb busbars Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm Motor protection devices Supply Linergy FH comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm Cable running
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices Cable compartment W = 800/650 mm D = 400 mm W = 300/400 mm D = 400 mm
400E10040
PD390407_SE_R.eps
PB105001.eps
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
35
Presentation
DD384517.EPS
Incomer
Masterpact NW20 4P Drawout Upstream terminals: vertical rear connection Downstream terminals: front connection Supply via Canalis from the top
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Rotary handle Supply Connection Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Cable running Connection Motor protection devices Supply Cable running
Distribution
Vertical Linergy LGYE 2000 A busbars Horizontal Linergy LGYE 2000 A busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices Cable compartment W = 650+150/800 mm D = 600 mm W = 300 mm D = 600 mm
Flexible bars Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm 200 A Linergy FM Trunking Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm Comb busbars Cable strap
36
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E10040
Presentation
Dd384518.EPS
Incomer
Masterpact NW32 4P (1) Fixed Upstream terminals: front connection Downstream terminals: vertical rear connection Supply via cables from the bottom
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, rear connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, rear connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, rear connection Toggle Supply Connection Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Cable running Motor protection devices Supply Cable running
Distribution
Vertical Linergy LGYbusbars Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 650+150/800 mm D = 1000 mm
Prefabricated connection Direct via cables 200 A Linergy FM Trunking Linergy FH comb busbars Cable straps
400E10040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
37
Presentation
PB105002.eps
1 2
Incoming function Connection via Canalis Distribution function Linergy LGY busbars in busbar compartment, W = 150 mm Horizontal busbars Linergy LGYE Linergy BW busbars
See page A-8 See page B-12 See page B-14 See page B-50 See page C-14 See page C-14 See page C-14 400E10050
3 4 5
38
Device compartment, W = 650 mm Connection compartment, W = 300 mm Connection compartment, W = 400 mm 16/04/2013
Version : 3.0
Presentation
PB105003.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6
400E10050
Hinged front plate support frame Roof Rear panels Front doors Gland plates Side panels
See page C-14 See page C-15 See page C-15 See page C-14 See page C-18 See page C-15
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
39
Standards
The IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) is a worldwide organisation for standardisation comprising all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National Committees). The object of the IEC is to promote international cooperation on all questions concerning standardisation in the electrical and electronic fields. To that end, the IEC publishes International Standards. Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees and any IEC National Committee interested in the subject dealt with may participate in the preparatory work.
National standards
DD383972.eps
Worldwide
In Europe The IEC documents are first studied by CENELEC, which establishes: b either a European standard (EN), often identical to the IEC standard, which then becomes the applicable national standard in all the member countries b or, in the event of differences, a harmonisation document (HD). Other IEC member countries Each country is autonomous and can accept the IEC standard as the national standard, with or without modifications. Even though they are IEC members, countries such as Japan and the United States continue to develop their own standardisation systems. Countries without a standardisation system It is possible to refer to an IEC standard in the framework of a project.
Dd381779.eps
Countries
CEI / IEC Commission Electrotechnique Internationale CENELEC Comit Europen de Normalisation ELECtrotechnique UTE Union Technique de llectricit VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik e.v. (German electrotechnical, electronics and computer technology standardisation organisation) BSI British Standards Institution
40
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E35000
Standards
There are different types of standards, including: b management standards b installation standards b product standards.
Dd381775.eps
Dd381776.eps
Management standards
ISO 9004: Quality-management systems - guidelines for performance improvements. Used in setting up a quality-management system. ISO 9001: Quality management systems - requirements. Used for certification audits.
ISO 14004: Environmental-management systems. General guidelines on the principles, systems and supporting techniques. ISO 14001: Environmental-management systems. Specification with guidance for use The majority of Schneider Electric development centres and factories are certified ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
Installation standards
Switchgear and controlgear. Installation.
The set of IEC 60364-X standards defines the main principles and rules on: b determining general characteristics of installations b protection b selection and installation of equipment b verification and maintenance of installations.
Product standards
They apply to devices or assemblies and are aimed at ensuring correct operation and safety of the concerned products. b standards on low-voltage switchgear and controlgear: v IEC 60947-1 : general rules v IEC 60947-2 : circuit breakers v IEC 60947-3 : switches and disconnectors v IEC 60947-4 : contactors v IEC 62208 / EN 50298: empty enclosures. b standards on low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: v IEC 61439-1: general rules v IEC 61439-2: power switchgear and controlgear assemblies v IEC 61439-3: distribution boards v IEC 61439-4: assemblies for construction sites v IEC 61439-5: assemblies for power distribution v IEC 61439-6: busbar trunking systems.
Regulations in a given country may make certain standards legally binding and may also create additional safety requirements. In addition to providing proof of the conformity of its quality-management system, a product manufacturer can demonstrate the quality of products by providing proof that the design and manufacture comply with the requirements in the applicable standard. Proof of conformity may be a declaration by the manufacturer or a certificate supplied by an independent organisation.
400E35000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
41
Standards
e marking
e marking is a regulatory symbol attributed under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer and intended for the verification authorities of the European countries that enforce the European regulations. It allows free circulation of a product in the European Union and certifies that it complies with the basic requirements in all the applicable European directives. e marking is not a quality symbol and does not indicate conformity with a standard. The e declaration is intended exclusively for the authorities in charge of verifying compliance with the applicable regulations and it is drafted, signed and held for presentation to the authorities by the manufacturer. For the Prisma P range, the declaration is the responsibility of the Schneider Electric unit that has designed and developed the product. For LV switchboards, the declaration is the responsibility of the panelbuilder. The following products receive e marking: b all products that are liable to endanger the safety of persons, animals and property (LV directive) b all products likely to emit electromagnetic disturbances above a standardised threshold or to be disturbed during operation (EMC directive). Consequences: b the Prisma P range falls under the LV directive only b LV switchboards are covered by the LV directive and may also fall under the EMC directive, depending on the type of devices incorporated.
For the Prisma P range, e marking is applied: b on the packing of mechanical components b on the product itself for electrical components. For the LV assemblies created by the panelbuilder, e marking is applied: b on the packing b on the rating plate (if applicable) b on one of the documents accompanying the switchboard when it is shipped.
42
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E35000
Standards
Degree of protection
Standard IEC 60364-5-51 lists and codifies a large number of external influences to which electrical installations can be subjected, including the presence of water, solid objects, shocks, vibrations, corrosive substances, etc.
IP code
Standard IEC 60529 (IP code, February 2001) indicates the degrees of protection provided by an enclosure for electrical devices against access to hazardous parts, against penetration of solid foreign objects and against penetration of water. These standards do not apply for the protection against the risks of explosion or conditions such a humidity, corrosive vapour, fungus or vermin. The IP code is made up of two characteristic numerals and can include an additional letter when the actual protection for persons against access to the hazardous parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral. The first numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of solid foreign objects and the protection of persons. The second numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of water with harmful effects.
Dd381959.eps
Dd381960.eps
Dd381963.eps
Dd381961.eps
Dd381961.eps
Dd381962.eps
Dd381962.eps
Dd381962.eps
Dd381964.eps
Dd381962.eps
Dd381965.eps
400E35000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
Dd381973.eps
Dd381972.eps
Dd381971.eps
Dust tight
Dd381970.eps
Dd381969.eps
Dd381968.eps
Dd381967.eps
Dd381966.eps
43
Standards
Additional letter
The additional letter is used only if the actual protection of persons is higher than that indicated by the first characteristic numeral of the IP code. Additional letter
A B C D
Protection
Protected against access with back of hand Protected against access with a 12 mm diameter finger Protected against access with a 2.5 mm diameter tool Protected against access with a 1 mm diameter wire
If only the protection of persons is of interest, the two characteristic numerals are replaced by the letter X, e.g. IPXXB. Illustration of the above explanations:
Protection against solid foreign objects larger than 2.5 mm
IP30D
Remarks b The degree of protection IP must always be read and understood numeral by numeral and not as a whole. For example, an IP31 wall-mount enclosure is suitable for an environment that requires a minimum degree of protection IP21. However an IP30 wall-mount enclosure is not suitable. b the degrees of protection indicated in this catalogue are valid for the enclosures as presented. However, the indicated degree of protection is guaranteed only when installation and device mounting are carried out in accordance with professional standards that conserve the initial degree of protection.
IK code
IK code
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Standard IEC 62262 defines an IK code characterising the capacity of products to resist mechanical impacts from all sides. Impact energy (joules)
0.14 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 2 5 10 20
IK codes can be selected according to the risks of impacts on a given site. Site
No risk of major impact Significant risk of impact that can damage devices Maximum risk of impact that can damage the switchboard Technical premises Hallways Workshops
Recommended IK
07 08 (switchboard with door) 10
44
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E35000
Presentation
A switchboard must comply with the equirements of standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 to guarantee the safety and reliability of the installation. Managers of installations, fully aware of the professional and legal liabilities weighing on their company and on themselves, demand a high level of safety for the electrical installation. What is more, the serious economic consequences of prolonged halts in production mean that the electrical switchboard must provide excellent continuity of service, whatever the operating conditions.
400E35000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
45
Presentation
Specifier
> Species the needs and constraints for design, installation, operation and upgrading of the complete system. > Checks that its requirements have been fully integrated by the Assembly Manufacturer. Depending on the application, the specier could be the end-user or a design ofce.
se As
y ly S mb
tem
Tes t
ed
As
Proje
ct spe
sem
Original Manufacturer
The organisation that has carried out the original design and the associated verication of an assembly system.
He is responsible for the "Design verications" listed by IEC 61439-2 including many electrical tests.
cica
tion*
bly
He is responsible for "Routine verications" on each panel produced, according to the standard. If he derivates from the instructions of the original manufacturer he has to carry out again design verications.
End-User
Should ask for a certied LV switchboard. By systematically requesting routine verications, he ensures that the assembly system used is compliant.
46
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E35000
Presentation
Current-carrying capability
To protect against burns and to withstand temperature rise: > when any circuit is continuously loaded, alone, to the specied current > when the assembly is loaded to the specied current according to the specied load pattern (between circuits and/or as a function of the time).
Continuity of service
Maintenance and modification capability
Capability to preserve continuity of supply without impairing safety during assembly maintenance or modication > Electrical condition of the assembly or various circuits > Speed of exchange of the functional units > Test facilities
Electro-Magnetic compatibility
To properly function (immunity) and not to generate EM disturbances (emission) in specied environmental conditions: > Industrial networks or locations (Environment A) > Domestic, commercial, and light industrial locations (Environment B).
400E35000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
47
Presentation
Chapter
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures Insulation clearances and creepage distances Protection against electric shocks and integrity of protection circuits Integration of incorporated components Internal electric circuits and connections Terminals for external conductors Mechanical operation Dielectric properties Wiring, operating performance and function 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10
Verified
Dielectric properties
The main circuits, and the auxiliary and control circuits connected to the main circuit, shall be subjected to the test voltage in accordance.
IEC 61439-1 paragraph 11.10
48
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E35000
400E35000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
49
PD391304_SE_R.eps
50
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E20030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Framework, W = 800, D = 400 Framework, W = 300, D = 400 Side panel, D = 400 Rear panel, W = 800 Rear panel, W = 300 Roof, W = 800, D = 400 Roof, W = 300, D = 400
08407 See page C-12 08403 See page C-12 08750 See page C-15 08738 See page C-15 08733 See page C-15 08438 See page C-15 08433 See page C-15 08497 See page C-18 08493 See page C-18 08566 See page C-12 08538 See page C-14 08513 See page C-14
14 Front plate for vertical Compact 03690 See page A-14 15 Connection for fixed Compact 16 17 18 19 20
NS630b/1600 NS630b/1250, 4P Connection for horizontal Compact NSX250 Connection transfer assembly for Compact NSX250 Linergy FC distribution block for 4P fixed Compact NSX250 devices with toggles Linergy BW busbars, 250 A, 4P, W = 1000 200 A Linergy FM, 4P 04486 See page A-14 04424 See page A-23 04426 See page A-23 04403 See page B-62 04122 See page B-51 04014 See page B-61 04004 See page B-60 04239 See page B-77 04243 See page B-77 04257 See page B-79 04504 See page B-18 04651 See page B-19
IP30 gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 9 IP30 gland plate, W = 300, D = 400 10 Hinged front plate support frame
400E20030
PD391303_SE_R.eps
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
51
DD384086.eps
NSX250 NS1000
NSX250
NSX250
INS
C60 or iC60
C60 or iC60
GV2
DD381987.eps
Order: b connection components b mounting plates and front plates b busbar connections.
Dd380822.eps
DD380878.eps
DD381986.eps
2
DD380870.eps
Device installation
Device
Fixed device
front conn.
DD381988.eps
3
DD380871.eps
Linergy BB connection
Front connectors
Prefabricated connection
Fixed device
DD383964.eps
1
DD383867.eps
Installation
Device
No of vertical modules
Mounting plate
DD383965.eps
DD380873.eps
Order: b mounting plates and front plates b busbar connections b connection accessories.
Prefabricated connection
DD383966.eps
3
DD380874.eps
Connection
Front connection or
Order: b mounting plates and front plates b distribution block b connection accessories.
Dd380824.eps
1
DD380875.eps
Installation
2
DD380876.eps
3
DD380877.eps
Connection
52
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E20040
DD385313.eps DD381996.eps DD382007.eps DD382006.eps DD382005.eps DD382004.eps DD383973.eps DD382002.eps DD385314.eps DD382000.eps DD381998.eps DD381997.eps
1
DD385316.eps
2
Dd381919.eps
b Linergy FH distribution block, see page A-41 b cable running, see page B-76
32 modules 1 cubicle
Plain front plate
1
DD380880.eps
6mm
10mm
6mm
10mm
6mm
10mm
6mm
10mm
2
DD380881.eps
Frameworks
2 3 4 5 6 7
400E20040
Rear panels
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
53
54
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E20040
Functional units
Contents
Presentation 22
Circuit breakers
Dedicated cubicle Dedicated cubicle
A-4
A-6 A-7 A-8
A-10 A-13
A-13 A-15
Compact NS1600b to 3200 Presentation of Compact NSX circuit breakers for Prisma P Compact NSX100 to NSX630
Horizontal - Toggle - Fixed Vertical - Toggle - Fixed Horizontal - Toggle - Plug-in Vertical - Toggle - Plug-in Horizontal - Rotary handle, motor mechanism - Fixed, plug-in Vertical - Rotary handle, motor mechanism - Fixed, plug-in Horizontal - All controls - Withdrawable Vertical - All controls - Withdrawable
Easypact CVS100/630 Horizontal fixed mounting Easypact CVS 100/630 Vertical fixed mounting Easypact EZC100
Vertical - Fixed - Toggle
Multi 9 or Acti 9 A-35 Modular devices - Multi 9 or Acti 9 y 63A A-36 80/160A A-37 Modular devices - NG125 circuit breaker A-38 Linergy BW busbars A-39 Modular devices - Rear Linergy BS busbars A-40 Modular devices - Distribution A-41
A-34
Switch-disconnectors A-42
Source-changeover systems - Compact / Masterpact
Source-changeover systems Possible combinations Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 - Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32 Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1000 Compact NS630b/1600 - Masterpact, NT06/16, NW08/32 Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16 Manual source-changeover systems - Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 Front direct rotary handle Manual source-changeover systems - Compact INS250 to 630 A-43 A-43 A-44 A-45 A-46 A-46 A-48 A-49
A-42
A-50 A-51
A-51 A-52
Switch-disconnectors A-51
Fusegear A-53
Fupact ISFL
Vertical - 3P Vertical - 3P
A-53
A-53 A-55
A-55 A-57
400E50010
Version : 2.0
A-1
Contents
Others A-59
Power factor correction equipment
VarplusCan A-60
A-59
Mounting on lateral and longitudinal cross-members Mounting on a plain backplate Mounting on a slotted plate Mounting on a modular rail
Switchboard lighting
A-83
A-2
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E50010
400E50010
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-3
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Front connection
Dd383680.eps
Note: connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.
Cable connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps
Device NW08/32
Fixed/drawout device
b
Dd383681.eps
Canalis connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps Dd383684.eps Dd380832.eps
Device
Canalis support
Fixed/drawout device
b b b b b b
Canalis/ device interface + connection 04715 04716 04725 04726 04735 04736
Canalis cover
04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861
Dd383682.eps
Rear connection
Cable connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps
Device
NW08/32
Fixed/drawout device
b
Cable cover
04863
Dd383683.eps
Canalis connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps Dd383684.eps Dd380832.eps
Device
Canalis support
Fixed/drawout device
b b b b b b
Canalis/ device interface + connection 04715 04716 04725 04726 04735 04736
Canalis cover
04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863
A-4
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21100
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Dd383686.eps
Device installation
Dd380834.eps Dd383685.eps Dd380833.eps Dd380835.eps
Device
No. of Mounting vert. plate mod. cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis 18 27 14 16 19 28 14 16 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500
Fixed device
NW08/16 front conn. NW08/16 rear conn. NW20/32 front conn. NW20/32 rear conn. 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03804 03805 + 03804 x 2 03804 + 03803 03805 03804 + 03805 x 2 03804 + 03803 03804 03804 x 3 03805 03805 03805 03804 + 03803 03805 03805 + 03804 x 2 03804 + 03803 03805 03805 03805
Drawout device
NW08/16 front conn. NW08/16 rear conn. NW20/32 front conn. NW20/32 rear conn. cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis 19 27 15 17 20 28 15 17 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710
Distribution
Dd383687.eps
Device
Front connectors 3P 4P b b b b
Connection
Cover for BB connection 04926 + 04927 04926 + 04927 04926 + 04927 04926 + 04927
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/16 (3) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1)
NW20/32 (4)
3P 4P
(1) For an Icw u 75 kA rms, use three free supports (04662 x 3). (2) For the connection to flat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase: b 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640) b 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641) (3) For LGYE and NW08/25 use a duct of 150 mm. (4) For LGYE and NW32/40 use an extension of 300 mm. Note: To make measurements: b install the CTs preferably upstream, on the supply terminal extension bars b or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection). In this case, add one module and a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18 Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20 Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.
DD383808.eps
400E21100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-5
Functional system
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Mounting
400 650 150
Dedicated cubicle
Dd384530.eps
Devices
Fixed device
Drawout device
Masterpact NW08/32
No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] cut-out upstream (1) downstream 1 36 03500 03711 [9] 03808 [8] 03808 [8] + 03803 [3]
Masterpact NW08/32
1 36 03500 03710 [10] 03808 [8] 03808 [8] + 03802 [2]
Dd384531.eps
(1) One or two 3-module front plates for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm measurement devices can be installed just above the cut-out front plate: bb 1 3-module front plate + 1 plain front plate 03807 (9 modules) bb 2 3-module front plates + 1 plain front plate 03806 (6 modules) (2) Please consult Schneider Electric.
Human-switchboard interface, see page A-67. Distribution Connection to horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars Connection to horizontal Linergy BS copper busbars
Dd384529.eps
04690 x 2
04690 x 2
04690 x 2
04690 x 2
04690 x 2
Connection
04602 (2) + 04605 (2) 04604 (2) + 04605 (2) 04607 (2) + 04642 04637 (3) + must + must be made + must be made + must be made be made 04860 04860 04860 04860
(1) The cover is compulsory behind front plates designed for measurement devices. (2) Catalogue numbers 04604, 04605 and 04607 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (3) Catalogue number 04637 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
A-6
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
401E21101
Functional system
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Connection
Horizontal busbars
DD384610.eps
Masterpact NW08/32 b
Dd384528.eps
(3)
04694 x 2
(3)
04861 -
(3)
b (3)
Busbar supports for connection between device / busbars Connection between device / busbars -
(3)
(1) Form 1 cable cover. (2) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. (3) Please consult Schneider Electric.
401E21101
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
A-7
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Front connection
Dd380794.eps
Cable connection
Dd380841.eps Dd380842.eps Dd380843.eps Dd380844.eps Dd380845.eps
Device
Front conn. 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P b b b b b b b b
Vert. conn. adapters 33642 33643 33642 33643 33642 33643 33642 33643
Cable-lug adapters
Spacing rods
Cable cover 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852
Fixed device
NT06/10 NT12/16 33644 33645 04691 04691
Drawout device
NT06/10 NT12/16 33644 33645
04691 04691
Dd380795.eps
Canalis connection
Dd380841.eps Dd380842.eps Dd383684.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380847.eps
Device
Front conn.
Arc-chute cover
Canalis support
Canalis interfaces
Canalis cover
Fixed device
NT06/12 3P 4P b b 47335 47336
03561 03561
04703 04704
Drawout device
NT06/12 3P 4P b b
03561 03561
04703 04704
04711 04712
Rear connection
Dd380796.eps
Cable connection
Dd380849.eps Dd380850.eps
Device
NT06/16 b 04693 x 2 04854 must be made (1) (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.
Fixed/drawout device
Cable cover
Connection
Dd380797.eps
Rear connection
Dd380850.eps Dd385307.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380849.eps Dd380847.eps
Device
04871 + must be made 04854 (1) 4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 + must be made 04854 (1) (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. NT06/16 3P b
Fixed/drawout device
04693 x 2
03561
04703
04713
A-8
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21110
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Device installation
DD380647.eps Dd380852.eps Dd380853.eps Dd380836.eps Dd380854.eps
Device
NT06/10 front conn. NT12 front conn. NT16 front conn. NT06/16 rear conn.
Fixed device
No. of Mounting vert. plate mod. 12 17 14 17 14 11 16 03484 03484 03484 03484 03484 03484 03484
NT06/10 front conn. NT12 front conn. NT16 front conn. NT06/16 rear conn.
Drawout device
13 18 15 18 15 11 16
Distribution
DD380648.eps
Device
NT06/12 NT16
Fixed device
NT06/12
3P b 04477 04926 4P b 04478 04926 NT16 3P b 04491 04926 4P b 04492 04926 Note: to make measurements: b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18.
Drawout device
DD380649.eps
Linergy BS busbars
Dd380855.eps Dd380857.eps DD380840.eps
Device
NT06/16
must be made
NT06/16 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926 Note: to make measurements: b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.
400E21110
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-9
Functional system
Devices No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate
Masterpact NT Fixed
1 36 03489
Dd382506.eps
Drawout
1 36 03488 03699 [12] 03723 [12] 03722 [12] 03722 [12]
Front plate cut-out 03698 [12] [no. of vert. upstream (1) cut-out 03723 [12] mod.] for 72 x 72 mm or 96 x 96 mm meters or plain 03722 [12] downstream (1) plain 03722 [12]
(1) Hinged or reversible (left or right-hand opening) front plates connect directly to the framework, without a front-plate support frame.
Measurement-device installation
Measurement devices are installed on a front plate (03723) using plastic mounting plates with cut-outs. The front plate can hold: b six 72 x 72 mm cases b or four 96 x 96 mm cases + 2 switches.
Measurement-device
Dd382670.eps Dd382633.eps
60 60 40 10 0 40 10 0
Devices
for 72 x 72 mm devices
Catalogue numbers Characteristics 03902
for 96 x 96 mm devices
03903
for 72 x 72 mm holes
03900
for 96 x 96 mm holes
03901
b Installation of three devices (72 x 72 mm cases) using plastic mounting plates (03902) and two devices (96 x 96 mm cases) + a switch using plastic mounting plates (03903) on a hinged front plate (03723). b The plain mounting plates have knock-outs for lamps, pushbuttons, switches or devices. Knock-outs for 03900: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45 x 45 mm device. Knock-outs for 03901: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45 x 45 or 72 x 72 mm device.
A-10
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
401E21900
Functional system
DD384519.EPS
04692 x 2
04692 x 2
Barrier (1)
04855
04855
04602 (2) -
must be made 10mm thick 04636 (3) + connection must be made 10 mm thick
Distribution
04662
Barrier (1)
04855
Connection
must be made
Free support 04662 (1) A barrier must be installed behind front plate 03723 when measurement devices are installed. (2) Catalogue number 04602 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (3) Catalogue number 04636 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
Connection between device and horizontal busbars must be made by the customer. Selection of Linergy BS bars for the connection: see pages B-26 - B-27. Selection of Linergy LGY or LGYE bars for the connection: see pages B-14 to B-17.
401E21900
DD383814.eps
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
A-11
Functional system
Arc-chute cover
47335
Accessories
Dd382513.eps Dd382514.eps
D = 400 08794
Dd382669.eps
A-12
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
401E21900
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Front connection
DD383692.eps
Cable connection
Dd380842.eps Dd380843.eps Dd380844.eps Dd380845.eps
Device
Front conn.
Arc-chute cover
Cable-lug adapters
Spacing rods
Cable cover
Fixed device
b b b b b b b b
Drawout device
33644 33645
04691 04691
33644 33645
04691 04691
Canalis connection
Dd380846.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380842.eps Dd380847.eps
Device
Front conn.
Arc-chute cover
Canalis support
Canalis interfaces
NS630b/1250 3P 4P
Fixed device
Canalis cover
b b
33596 33597
03561 03561
04703 04704
NS630b/1250 3P
Drawout device
4P
b b
03561 03561
04703 04704
04711 04712
Cable connection
DD383694.eps Dd380849.eps
Device
NS630b/1600
Fixed device
Dd380850.eps
Cable cover
Connection
b b
NS630b/1600
Drawout device
04853 04854
(1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.
DD383695.eps
Canalis connection
Dd380849.eps Dd380850.eps Dd380846.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380847.eps
Device
NS630b/1600 3P 4P
Fixed device
Canalis support
Canalis interfaces
Canalis cover
03561 03561
04703 04704
NS630b/1600 3P 4P
Drawout device
b b
04693 x 2 04693 x 2
03561 03561
04703 04704
04713 04714
400E21130
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-13
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Device installation
Dd380836.eps Dd380853.eps Dd383549.eps Dd380852.eps Dd380854.eps
Device
NS630b/1000 cables front conn. Canalis NS1250 front cables conn. Canalis Fixed Compact NS.
Dd383700.eps
Fixed device
No. of Mounting vert. plate mod. 12 17 14 17 14 10 16 03482 03482 03482 03482 03482 03482 03482
03690(1) / 03701(2) 03802 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 + 03803 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 + 03803 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03806
NS630b/1000 cables front conn. Canalis NS1250 front cables conn. Canalis NS1600front cables conn. NS630b/1600 cables rear conn. Canalis Withdrawable Compact NS.
Drawout device
13 18 15 18 15 11 16
(1) For toggle and rotary handle (in this case, the front plate should be removed when handling the plate supporting frame). (2) For motor mechanism.
Distribution
Dd383701.eps
Device
NS630b/1250 NS1600
Fixed device
Front connectors 3P 4P 3P 4P b b b b
3P b 04477 04926 4P b 04478 04926 NS1600 3P b 04491 04926 4P b 04492 04926 Note: to make measurements: vv install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values vv or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate downstream (03801). Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. NS630b/1250
Dd383702.eps
Withdrawable device
Linergy BS busbars
Dd380855.eps Dd380857.eps Dd380840.eps
Device
Front connectors b
Connection
NS630b/1600
04926 NS630b/1600 b must be made (1) 04662 x 2 Note: to make measurements: vv install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values vv or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate downstream (03801). (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.
A-14
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21130
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Connection
Dd383550.eps
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000
3P 04483 (1) 4P 04484 (1) (1) Three 300 mm or six 185 mm cables can be connected per phase with lugs that are not of the two-metal type.
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 Connection transfer assembly.
Installation
Dd383551.eps
Device
Mounting plate
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 3P/4P 7 (1) 03480 03687 (1) Mounting of 03480 + connection transfert assembly 04483 or 04484 needs 8 vertical modules (use of one complementary front plate 1 module 03801).
Distribution
Dd383552.eps
Fixed Compact NS
3P 04473 04842 4P 04474 04842 Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. NS630b/1000
400E21130
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-15
Functional system
Mounting
400
400
Dedicated cubicle
Devices
DD382506.eps
(1) Hinged or reversible (left or right-hand opening) front plates connect directly to the framework, without a front-plate support frame.
Measurement-device installation
Measurement devices are installed on a front plate (03723) using plastic mounting plates with cut-outs. The front plate can hold: b six 72 x 72 mm cases b or four 96 x 96 mm cases + 2 switches.
Measurement-device
Dd382670.eps Dd382633.eps
60 60 40 10 0 40 10 0
Devices
for 72 x 72 mm devices
Catalogue numbers Characteristics 03902
for 96 x 96 mm devices
03903
for 72 x 72 mm holes
03900
for 96 x 96 mm holes
03901
b Installation of three devices (72 x 72 mm cases) using plastic mounting plates (03902) and two devices (96 x 96 mm cases) + a switch using plastic mounting plates (03903) on a hinged front plate (03723). b The plain mounting plates have knock-outs for lamps, pushbuttons, switches or devices. Knock-outs for 03900: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45x45 mm device. Knock-outs for 03901: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45x45 or 72x72 mm device.
A-16
Version : 1.1
16/04/2013
401E21910
Functional system
Devices
Front connection
DD384519.EPS
04692 x 2
04692 x 2
04692 x 2
04692 x 2
Barrier (1)
04855
04855
04855
04855
04602 (2) -
04602 -
must be made (4) 10mm thick 04636 (3) + connection must be made (4) 10 mm thick
must be made (4) 10mm thick 04636 + connection must be made (4) 10 mm thick
Distribution
Devices
Front connection
DD383814.eps
04662
04662
Connection
Barrier (1)
04855
04855
Free support 04662 (1) A barrier must be installed behind front plate 03723 when measurement devices are installed. (2) Catalogue number 04602 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (3) Catalogue number 04636 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (4) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.
04662
Connection between device and horizontal busbars must be made by the customer. Selection of Linergy BS bars for the connection: see pages B-26 - B-27. Selection of Linergy LGYE or LGY bars for the connection: see pages B-14 or B-17. 401E21910 Version : 1.1 16/04/2013 A-17
Functional system
Arc-chute cover
Accessories
Dd382513.eps Dd382514.eps
D = 400 08794
A-18
Version : 1.1
16/04/2013
401E21910
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Connection
Dd383546.eps
Device
Front connectors
Verticalconnection adapters
Fixed device
3P b 33975 04694 400 4P b 33976 04694 400 NS2000/2500 3P b 33975 04694 600 4P b 33976 04694 600 600 NS3200 3P b must be made (1) 04694 600 4P b must be made (1) 04694 (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. NS1600b Compact NS3200.
Device installation
Dd383547.eps
Device
Mounting plate
Fixed device
NS1600b/3200 03501 03716 03802 03804
Compact NS1600b.
400E21120
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-19
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Dd383548.eps
Distribution
Fixed device
3P must be made 04662 x 2 04926 (1) (2) 4P 04926 + 04927 NS2000/2500 3P must be made 04662 x 2 (1) (2) 4P 04926 + 04927 NS3200 3P must be made 04662 x 2 (1) (2) 4P (1) For the connection to flat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase: b 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640) b 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641). (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. NS1600b Note: to make measurements: b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-14. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-26.
A-20
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21120
Functional units
Circuit breakers
PB103371-25.eps
PB103354-25.eps
Performance level
Applications
Usual applications with low short-circuit levels, e.g. service sector applications, retail stores, etc. Small industrial installations High performance at a reasonable cost Demanding applications, e.g. merchant marine, metallurgy, etc.
400E00035
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-21
Functional units
Circuit breakers
The Compact NSX range is perfectly interchangeable with Compact NSX. As for Compact NS, installation of Compact NSX devices in a Prisma P functional switchboard is very easy, based on the same functional-unit system: b same mounting plates as for the Compact NS b same power connections (Linergy FC distribution block and prefabricated connections) b identical control connections b identical partitioning (form 2b to 4b) b same modularity (taking into account the safety clearances). This greatly facilitates extension, maintenance and retrofitting operations in Prisma P switchboards. b Only the front plates have been changed for this new range.
The front of Compact NSX circuit breakers has an eye-pleasing curved profile, making Prisma P switchboards even more attractive. This change is perfectly in step with the new cut-out for Prisma P front plates (the same cut-out for all types of controls).
Toggle
Rotary handle
As mentioned above, Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 5/6 A or E trip units provide measurements that can be read on the FDM121 display module or directly on the circuit breaker. This makes it possible to optimise the space required by the functional unit. Installation times have also been reduced with respect to system with current transformers. What is more, installation and connections are made easier because the FDM121 is installed just like the 96 x 96 mm Power Meter PM devices: b direct cut-out in a plain door b on a front for one or four 96 x 96 devices in the functional unit or the 300 mm wide duct door.
Note: a single 24 V DC power supply is required to power both the FDM121 display and the Micrologic trip unit.
DD384027.eps
PB391291-57.eps
OK e
Mod
OK e
Mod
OK e
Mod
OK e
Mod
For more information on the communication functions of Compact NSX, see the ULPsystem user manual, doc. no. TRV99100, and the Compact NSX catalogue, doc. no. LVPED208001_EN.
A-22
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00035
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
DD383868.eps
Mounting plate
Busbar connection
DD380513.eps
Prefabricated connection.
DD380693.eps
DD380694.eps
Connection
Device
Front connection Long terminal or Connection transfer shields assembly 3P 4P 3P 4P LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594 04425 04426 04455 04456
3P LV429517 04429 (2) + LV429515 LV429515 (1) 4P LV429518 04430 (2) + LV429516 LV429516 (1) Vigi NSX400/630 3P LV432593 04459 (2) + LV432591 LV432591 (1) 4P LV432594 04460 (2) + LV432592 LV432592 (1) (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42. (2) No connection.
400E21150
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-23
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
DD380506.eps
No. of devices
Mounting plate
Dd383554.eps
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 8 03420 03241 03801 03802 Vigi NSX250 3/4 9 03420 03241 03802 Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297 03802 03802 Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297 03801 03803 Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 (1) For the Compact NSX100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Linergy FC distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream plain front plate (03802).
Accessories
Dd381339.eps
Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.
Busbar connection
DD380508.eps
Accessories
Linergy FC distribution block with connection. Linergy FC tooth-caps Linergy FC distribution block: see page B-62.
Cat. no.
04809
Connection
DD380696.eps
Device NSX100/250
A-24
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21150
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
DD383869.eps
Mounting plate
Busbar connection
DD384325.eps
Linergy busbars
Device NSX100/250 3P 4P 3P 4P Prefabricated connection 04431 04432 04461 04462 Adaptator + terminal shields LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594
NSX400/630
Terminal shields.
Dd383558.eps
Connection
Device
Front connection Adaptator + long or transfer assembly terminal shields (w/o connection) + adaptator + long terminal shields 3P 4P LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594 04429 + LV429306 + LV429517 04430 + LV429307 + LV429518 04459 + LV432584 + LV432593 04460 + LV432585 + LV432594
3P
4P
400E21150
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-25
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Dd383559.eps
Installation
No. of devices
No. of Mounting Cut-out vertical plate front plate (2) modules 9 10 7 8 11 11 13 13 03421 (1) 03421 (1) 03423 03423 03461 03461 03461 03461 03243 03243 03243 03243 03275 03663 03275 03663
Downst. front plate 03801 03802 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803
03421.
DD383621.eps
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 11 03421 (1) 03241 03801 + 03802 03801 Vigi NSX250 3/4 12 03421 (1) 03241 03801 + 03802 03802 Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 9 03423 (2) 03241 03801 03801 Vigi NSX250 3/4 10 03423 (2) 03241 03801 03802 Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297 03802 Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666 03802 03802 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297 03801 03803 Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 (1) Not compatible with Linergy FC distribution block. For feeding by cables, add an upstream plain front plate of 2 modules (03802). (2) Compatible with Linergy FC distribution block.
03801 + 03802 03801 + 03802 03801 03801 03801 03802 03802 03803
DD383620.eps
Accessories
Dd381339.eps
03423. Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.
Busbar connection
Dd383560.eps
4 x 3P 04405 (1) LV429306 LV429307 3 x 4P 04406 (1) (1) Catalogue number 04924 is recommended when installing those references. NSX100/250
Adaptator
NSX100/250
Adaptator
LV429306 LV429307
Accessories
04809
Cat. no.
Dd383561.eps
Connection
Device NSX100/250 3P 4P NSX400/630 3P 4P
Front connection Rear connection Adaptator + long terminal shields Long insulated terminals LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585
A-26
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21150
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
Dd383562.eps
NSX400/630 (1)
NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604 LV429285 Rotary handle 4P 4 03414 03606 LV429285 NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604 LV429285 Motor mech. 4P 4 03414 03606 LV429285 NSX400/630 (1) 3P 4 03453 03643 LV429285 Rotary handle 4P 5 03454 03644 LV429285 (1) NSX400/630 3P 4 03453 03643 LV429285 Motor mech. 4P 5 03454 03644 LV429285 (1) For direct installation under horizontal busbars, the busbars must be covered: see page B-38. (2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism.
Busbar connection
Dd383563.eps
NSX100/250 NSX400/630
Connection
Terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 LV429306 + LV429515 LV429307 + LV429516 LV432584 + LV432591 LV432585 + LV432592
Terminal shields.
3P must be made 4P must be made 3P must be made NSX400/630 4P must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64. NSX100/250
Connection
Dd383565.eps
Device
Front connection Adaptator + or transfer assembly long terminal (w/o connection) shields + adaptator + long terminal shields 04429 + LV429515 04430 + LV429516 04459 + LV432591 04460 + LV432592 04429 + LV429306 + LV429517 04430 + LV429307 + LV429518 04459 + LV432584 + LV432591 04460 + LV432585 + LV432592
LV429515 (1) LV429516 (1) LV432591 (1) LV432592 (1) LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 LV432476 + LV432585
400E21150
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-27
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Dd383566.eps
Installation
Downst. Collar and raiser front plate 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3)
Vigi NSX100/160 Vigi NSX250 Vigi NSX400 (rot.) Vigi NSX400 (rot.) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX400 NSX630 NSX630
Dd383567.eps
03801 03802 03802 03802 03802 03801 03803 03803 03803 03801 03801 03801 03802 03802 03803 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 9 03421 03244 03801 03801 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX250 3/4 10 03421 03244 03801 03802 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 1 13 03461 03297 03802 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 2 13 03461 03666 03802 03802 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 1 15 03461 03297 03801 03803 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) (1) For the Compact NSX100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Linergy FC distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream plain front plate (03802). (2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism. (3) For ammeter, take LV429285 + LV429318 catalogue numbers. Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.
7 8 11 11 13 13
Accessories
Busbar connection
Dd383568.eps
Adaptator
4 x 3P 04405 + LV429306 04405 (1) 04406 + LV429307 3 x 4P 04406 (1) (1) Catalogue number 04924 is recommended when installing those references. NSX100/250
Adaptator
NSX100/250
LV429306 LV429307
Dd383569.eps
Connection
Linergy FC tooth-caps Linergy FC distribution block: see page B-62. Device NSX100/250 NSX400/630 NSX100/250 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P Front connection Adaptator + long terminal shields LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594
Accessories
Cat. no.
04809
Rear connection Short terminal Long insulated shields terminals LV429515 (1) LV429516 (1) LV432591 (1) LV432592 (1) LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585
NSX400/630
3P 4P
A-28
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21150
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
DD383870.eps
Compact NSX
NSX100/250 NSX400/630
Vigicompact NSX
Vigi NSX100/250 1 5 03415 03618 LV429285 03657 LV429285 Vigi NSX400/630 1 6 03462 (1) toggle, rotary handle (1) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism.
Busbar connection
Dd383571.eps
D C B A
NSX400/630
NSX100/250 NSX400/630
Connection
Dd383573.eps
Device
Rear connection or transfer assembly Long insulated (w/o connection) terminals + adaptator + long terminal shields 04429 + LV429306 + LV429517 04430 + LV429307 + LV429518 04459 + LV432584 + LV432591 04460 + LV432585 + LV432592 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585
NSX100/250
400E21150
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-29
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
Dd383574.eps
No. of Mounting Cut-out vert. plate front mod. plate 8 9 11 11 11 13 13 13 10 11 03421 03421 03461 03243 03243 03275
Upstream Downst. front front plate plate 03802 03802 03801 03801 03802 03802 03802 03803 03802 03802 03801 03802 03801 03801 03802 03802 03802 03803 03801 03802
Collar and raiser (1 per device) LV429284 (1) LV429284 (1) LV432534
Compact NSX
NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 toggle NSX400 rotary handle, motor mech. NSX400 NSX630 toggle NSX630 rotary handle, motor mech. NSX630 Vigi NSX100/160 Vigi NSX250 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2
03461 (2) 03275 03461 (2) 03663 03461 03275 03461 (2) 03275 03461 (2) 03663 03421 03421 03244 03244
LV432534 (1) LV429285 + LV429284 (1) LV429285 + LV429284 (1) LV429285 + LV432534 LV429285
Vigicompact NSX
Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297 03802 toggle 03297 03802 Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 rotary handle Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666 03802 03802 LV429285 toggle + LV432534 03666 03802 03802 LV429285 Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 rotary handle, motor mech. 03803 LV429285 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297 03801 + LV432534 toggle 03297 03801 03803 LV429285 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 rotary handle Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 LV429285 toggle + LV432534 03666 03803 03803 LV429285 Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 rotary handle, motor mech. (1) For devices with toggle only. (2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism.
Connection
Dd383575.eps
Front connection Adaptator + long terminal shields LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594
Rear connection Long insulated terminals LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585
A-30
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21150
Functional system
Horizontal fixed
DD383868.eps
Devices
Toggle
LV429517 Long terminal shields (1) (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning.
Mounting
650
Horizontal fixed
Dd383562.eps
Devices
Rotary handle
(1) Vigi CVS only. (2) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning. Note: temperature derating values for Easypact CVS: see page D-45.
401E21151
Version : 1.1
16/04/2013
A-31
Functional system
Vertical fixed
DD380506.eps
Devices No. of devices per plate No. of vertical modules Mounting plates Front plates with cut-out [No. of vertical upstream modules] downstream Short terminal shields (1) Long terminal shields Divisible blanking plate for CVS
Toggle
Easypact CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 9 03420 03243 [5] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] 3P: LV429515 4P: LV429516 3P: LV429517 4P: LV429518 03249
Vigi CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 11 03420 03241 [7] 03802 [2] 03802 [2]
03249 + 03221
Divisible blanking plate for CVS Vigi (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning.
Mounting
650
Vertical fixed
Dd383566.eps
Devices No. of devices per plate No. of vertical modules Mounting plates Front plates with cut-out [No. of vertical upstream modules] downstream Collar and raiser Short terminal shields (1) Long terminal shields
Rotary handle
Easypact CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 9 03422 03243 [5] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] 3P: LV429515 4P: LV429516 3P: LV429517 4P: LV429518
Vigi CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 11 03422 03244 [7] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] LV429285
Divisible blanking plate for CVS 03249 (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning.
A-32
Version : 1.1
16/04/2013
401E21151
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Easypact EZC100
Vertical Fixed Toggle
Device
Installation
DD383576.eps
Easypact
EZC100 15 x 1P 5 x 3P 3 x 4P 5 5 5 03502 03502 03502 03303 03303 03303 EZATSHD3P EZATSHD4P
Accessories Designation
1 divisible blanking plate, H = 85 mm, W = 147 mm colour: white RAL 9001
Cat. no.
03249
400E21151
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-33
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Installation
DD384003.eps
Vertical devices
Device No. of devices per row 4 x 3P 3 x 4P 2 x 3P 2 x 4P No. of vertical modules 7 7 10 10 Mounting plate Cut-out front plate Long terminal shields (set of 2) EZETSHD3PN EZETSHD4PN EZ4TSHD3P EZ4TSHD4P
Easypact
EZC250/EZCV250 EZC400
Easypact EZC250/EZCV250.
DD384004.eps
Horizontal devices
Device No. of devices per row 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P No. of vertical modules 4 4 5 5 Mounting plate Cut-out front plate Long terminal shields (set of 2) EZETSHD3P EZETSHD4P EZ4TSHD3P EZ4TSHD4P
Easypact
EZC250/EZCV250 EZC400
Easypact EZC400.
A-34
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21151
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Modular devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9
NG160, NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breakers INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Presentation
A rigid modular rail Made using an aluminium alloy, the rail design is extremely rigid. The rail supports are crimp mounted. Fast mounting The rail supports have positioning studs to guide the rail on the framework. Only two mounting screws are required. Multiple functions A number of devices clip directly onto the rails, including 80 A and 200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks, all horizontal cable-running accessories such as cable straps and trunking supports, as well as the supports for Linergy TB earth bars. What is more, for cable running to the Linergy TB terminal block at the top or bottom of the cubicle, the supports are designed to allow the passage to two vertical trunking sections on the left and right. Supply from all directions Supply to the rows, using Linergy FH or Linergy FM distribution blocks, can be via: b Linergy BS or Linergy BW insulated busbars installed behind the devices b Linergy BS or Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY, Linergy BS busbars installed in a busbar compartment.
Presentation
PB105004.eps
Distribution
80 and 200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks b fast and secure front connection using spring terminals b reliable connections, will not loosen over time, insensitive to vibrations and thermal b variations b all types of modular devices can be mixed b easy balancing of phases b interchangeable devices b easy installation upgrades b fully insulated (IPxxB).
Compact NSX400 with motor mechanism, supplying rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices via Linergy BW insulated busbars.
Linergy FH b direct connection to device terminals or via a connector b fully insulated b can be cut to length.
PB105005.eps
Cable running
Straps b easy and fast to install b low cost b perfectly organised and integrated cable running b professional finish. Trunking b Traditional solution.
400E21400
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-35
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Modular devices
Device
Modular rail
All supply systems (Linergy FH, Linergy 4 FM) with cable straps and trunking sections
03401
Dd380772.eps
Linergy FH. Cable running: cable straps. Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.
Dd381305.eps
80 A Linergy FM. Cable running: cable straps. Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.
Modular rail
Designation
3 rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A supply via Linergy FH or Linergy FM distribution blocks (63/80 A) Cable running using cables straps 8 03401 x 3
A-36
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21400
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Modular devices
80/160A
NG160, NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breakers INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Device
NG160, Vigi NG160 5 03402 + 04227 (1) To add modular devices to the row, order a raised DIN rail (04227).
Device
Modular rail
INS switch-disconnector
DD380770.eps
Device
Modular rail
INS160
INS40/160 INS100/160 with long terminal shields 03401 03401
400E21400
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-37
Modular devices
Device
All supply systems (Linergy FH, 63/160 A 1/2 4 row Linergy FM) with cable straps and trunking sections Supply via 63 A Linergy FM or Linergy FH with cable straps
03404
03213
Device
Designation
03404
03214
03811
Device
Designation
03404
03214
03811
Device
Compact INS40/160 switch4 disconnector Compact INS100/160 switch5 disconnectorwith long ter. shields
Designation
03404 03404
A-38
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21400
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Modular devices
Linergy BW busbars
Connections
Dd381306.eps
Presentation The Linergy BW insulated busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595) made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members. The busbars can be positioned at precisely the desired spot, to the left (preferably), in the middle or to the right of the row of devices. The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism, etc.). For busbars: b y 800 mm long, order one Prisma G adapter (03595) b > 800 mm long, order two Prisma G adapters (03595 x 2). Cat. no. selection Designation
Linergy BW insulated busbars Prisma G adapter, W= 500 mm (03595)
Dd383289.eps
Dd381162.eps
Dd381161.eps
Dd381160.eps
Respects the degree of protection IpxxB on both busbar and device ends. Neutral is clearly indicated (blue). NG160 incoming device (located on left-hand side), NG125, INS160, C120 or iC120 One-piece 3/4 P fast connection to busbars, equipped with male fittings one end for tunnel terminals . Designation Cat. no.
One-piece connection, 160A, W = 150 mm 04147
A multi-purpose connection for: bb supply to Linergy BW busbars from a switchboard incomer bb supply to a row incomer from Linergy BW busbars.
Dd383274.eps
NG160 Vigi incoming device (located on left-hand side) NG160 (without Vigi) incoming device (located in the middle) NG125, INS160, C120 or iC120
One-piece 3/4 P fast connection to busbars, equipped with male fittings one end for tunnel terminals . Designation Cat. no.
One-piece connection, 160A, W = 440 mm
Dd383276.eps
Dd383290.eps
04148
400E21400
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-39
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Modular devices
Installation Solution 1 The rear Linergy BS busbars are mounted using a Prisma G adapter (03595) made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members. The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism, etc.). The number of adapters that must be ordered depends on the required number of supports. Solution 2 The support for the busbars clips to the rear of the modular rail. Cat. no. selection Designation
Rear Linergy BS busbars Prisma G adapter, W = 500 mm (03595) see page B-53 see page A-78
A-40
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21400
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Modular devices
Distribution
Designation
Linergy DX 4P distribution block 125 A 6 modules 52 holes See page B-55.
Cat. no.
04045 04046
Designation
Linergy FM 4P distribution block 63 A 12 modules 20 holes Linergy FM, 80 A Linergy FM, 80 A, 4P Linergy FM 4P distribution block 160 A 12 modules 27 holes Linergy FM 2P distribution block 200 A 24 modules 24 holes Linergy FM 3P distribution block 200 A 24 modules 42 holes Linergy FM 4P distribution block 200 A 24 modules 54 holes 4P connection Linergy BW insulated BB/Linergy FM distribution block 200 A 4 connections NG160/Linergy FM distribution block 160 A See page B-60.
Cat. no.
04008 04000 04004 04018 04012 04013 04014 04021 04030
Cat. no.
14881 14891 14882 14892 14883 14893 14884 14894
Cat. no.
14811 14812 14813 14814 14818
Cable running
DD380811.eps
Designation
Cable straps 12 vertical cable straps 2 covers, 1-meter long, for vertical cable straps 12 horizontal cable straps 4 covers, 430 mm long, for horizontal cable straps Trunking 4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, W = 450 mm 12 horizontal trunking supports 10 adaptable support for horizontal trunking Vertical section, 80 x 60 mm, W = 2 m See page B-76.
Cat. no.
04262 04263 04239 04243 04257 04255 04256 04267
Blanking plates
DD384029.eps
Designation
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, W = 1 m 4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, W = 90 mm See page C-23.
Cat. no.
03220 03221
400E21400
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-41
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Source changeover
Dd381669.eps
General
To ensure the supply of energy at all times, certain electrical installations are connected to two sources: bb the normal source bb the replacement source that steps in to supply the installation if the normal source is not available. A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Compact or Masterpact switch-disconnectors or circuit breakers (or a mixture) avoids simultaneous connection of the two sources during switching. The source-changeover system can be: bb manual when the devices are mechanically interlocked bb remote operated when there is also an electrical interlocking system bb automatic, by adding an automatic controller that manages switching from one source to another according to a number of external parameters.
This is the most simple system. A human operator is required and consequently, the transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is delayed. A manual source-changeover system comprises two or three manually controlled devices (circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors) that are mechanically interlocked. The interlocking system avoids simultaneous connection (even transient) of the two sources.
This is the most commonly used system. No human intervention is required. The transfer from the normal to the replacement source is managed electrically. A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three devices linked by an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners. Device control is backed up by a mechanical interlocking system that protects against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and inhibits incorrect manual operation.
When a remote-operated source-changeover system is combined with an automatic controller, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes. This solution provides optimum energy management: bb switching to a replacement source depending on any external conditions bb management of sources bb regulation bb emergency source replacement, etc. A communications function for dialogue with a supervisor is available for the automatic controller. See the catalogue dedicated to Compact and Masterpact sourcechangeover systems (ref. ABTEDA-3901149EN).
A-42
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21160
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Source-changeover systems
Manual source-changeover
Type of device
Complete assembly INS250 (ratings 100 to 250) INV100 to INV250 (1) INS320 to INS630 INV320 to INV630 (1) NSX100 to NSX250 NSX400 to NSX630 NS630b to NS1600 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW32 (1) Visible break function. (2) In 2 or 3 cubicles.
Dd383703.eps
Type of interlocking
Toggle
b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
Replacement R
NS630b to NS1600 b b b b b NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW40
Compact NS630b/1600 device one above the other, mechanical interlocking using cables.
400E21160
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-43
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
The devices are equipped with a rotary handle. They are mounted on a dedicated mounting plate: bb vertically for Compact NSX100/250 bb horizontally for Compact NSX400/630.
No. of vertical Mounting modules plate NSX100/250 NSX400/630 Cut-out front Upstream plate front plate 03245 03659 03802 Downstream front plate 03803
ON I
reset
O OFF
03428 03458
3P 4P 3P 4P
Front connection long terminal shields LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594 For 3P device LV432595 Catalogue number LV429369 LV432621 For 3P device LV429358 LV432619
Rear connection short terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 For 4P device LV432596
Designation Devices Shields for spreaders NSX400/630 Designation Mechanical interlock Designation Coupling accessory
A
Compact NSX400/630.
The devices are equipped with a direct rotary handle. They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
Mounting plate 03491 Cut-out front plate 03695
Compact NS rotary handle, front connection Incoming and busbar connections to be made.
Designation Long terminal shields Mechanical interlock Devices NS630b/1000 NS630b/1000 For 3P device 33628 33890 For 4P device 33629 33890
Compact NS630b/1000.
A-44
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21160
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Source-changeover system with 2 devices one above the other or side-by-side in two combined cubicles
bb These configurations correspond to two standard incoming devices in terms of: v selection of functional units v number of modules To determine the number of modules required for installation of two devices one on top of another, add the number of modules required for each. vv incoming and busbar connection vv partitions and covers Devices mounted vertically bb type of interlocking: vv mechanical interlocking using cables vv interlocking of rotary handles (for Compact NS630b/1600 only) For possible combinations and details concerning installation, see the catalogue dedicated to Compact and Masterpact source-changeover systems (ref. ART 29770).
Note: does not operate with 2 NW40s placed one above the other.
Compact NS630b/1600 See page A-13. Masterpact NT06/16 See page A-8. Masterpact NW08/40 See page A-4. All combinations of Masterpact NT and NW fixed and drawout devices are possible.
400E21160
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-45
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Remote-operated sourcechangeover
Device installation
Compact NSX100/630
DD383811.eps
NSX100/250 8 03417(1) 03616 NSX400/630 10 03457(2) 03656 (1) Order mounting plate + IVE electrical interlocking unit for NSX100/250 (cat. no. 29350 for AC or 29351 for DC version). (2) Order mounting plate + IVE electrical interlocking unit for NSX400/630 (cat. no. 32610 for AC or 32611 for DC version).
Rear connection short terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 For 4P device LV432596 For 4P device LV429359 LV432620
Designation Devices For 3P device Coupling accessory NSX100/250 LV429358 NSX400/630 LV432619
Compact NSX400/630.
Source-changeover system with 2 devices one above the other or side-by-side in two combined cubicles
bb These configurations correspond to two standard incoming devices in terms of: vv selection of functional units vv number of modules
To determine the number of modules required for installation of two devices one on top of another, add the number of modules required for each. vv incoming and busbar connection vv partitions and covers. Devices mounted vertically. Mechanical interlocking using cables + electrical interlocking. For possible combinations and details concerning installation, see the catalogue dedicated to Compact and Masterpact source-changeover systems (ref. LVPED211022EN).
Note: does not operate with 2 NW40s placed one above the other.
In case of connection on a vertical busbar protected by a form 2 partitioning, a form 2 restoration kit is mandatory (see form 2 partitioning page B-36). Compact NS630b/1600 see page A-13. All fixed and all withdrawable combinations are possible. Masterpact NT06/16 see page A-8. All fixed, drawout and fixed + drawout combinations are possible. Masterpact NW08/32 see page A-4. All fixed, drawout and fixed + drawout combinations are possible. All combinations of Masterpact NT and NW fixed and drawout devices are possible.
A-46
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21160
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
UA or BA controller
UA or BA controller
400E21160
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-47
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
INS-INV250
03235
Compact INS-INV250.
Dd383707.eps
Compact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
Device No. of vertical modules 10 Mounting plate 03458 Cut-out front plate 03659
INS-INV320/630
Switch-disconnector INS-INV
Compact INS-INV320/630.
A-48
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21250
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Device
INS250
Switch-disconnectors INS
9 Designation
For 3P device For 4P device 31140 31144 31142 31146 31141 31145 31143 31147
Dd383708.eps
Compact INS320/630
Device
INS320/630
Switch-disconnectors INS
Designation Rating 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A
For 3P device For 4P device 31148 31150 31152 31154 31149 31151 31153 31155
Complete sourcechangeover assembly Compact INS-INV320/630. Designation Coupling accessory Long terminal shields (set of 2)
400E21250
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-49
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Connection
Dd383580.eps
Cable connection
Device Vertical connection adapters 31301 31302 Vertical connection adapters Cable-lug adapters Terminal extension bar support
Compact INS-INV
3P 4P 3P 4P
33975 33976
33644 33645
Depending on the type of front connection, an Compact INS-INV2000-2500 can be mounted in a 400 mm or 600 mm deep enclosure. For rear connection, a 600 mm deep enclosure is required.
04694 04694
Compact INS-INV630b/1600.
Device installation
Dd383581.eps
Device
INS-INV630b/ 1600
Compact INS-INV
No. of modules 14 14 16
Cut-out front Upstream plate front plate 03713 03714 03715 03804 03804 03803
INS-INV20002500
3P 4P 3P/4P
Distribution
Dd383582.eps
INS-INV630b/ 1600
Compact INS-INV
INS-INV20002500 (1) Partitioning of devices must be made. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.
3P 4P 3P/4P
A-50
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21210
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Installation
DD380543.eps
Device
Mounting plate
Busbar connection
DD380544.eps
DD381423.eps
Connection
DD380545.eps
Device
400E21200
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-51
Functional units
Switch-disconnectors
Installation
DD380546.eps
Device
No. of devices
Mounting plate
Busbar connection
DD380547.eps
Accessories
Linergy FC tooth-caps
Cat. no.
04809
DD380548.eps
Accessories
Linergy FC tooth-caps 04809
Connection
DD380549.eps
Device
A-52
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E21200
Functional units
Fusegear
Fupact ISFL
Vertical 3P
Mounting principle
bb The fuses are installed on the horizontal bars which are in turn supported by a mounting plate bb The front plates are secured to the hinged front plate support frame bb The front may be covered either by a cover frame or a plain or transparent door bb Current transformers can be installed behind ISFL fuse-switch disconnectors. Cat. no. selection
Device Qty per row No. of Mounting plate + horizontal modules bars occupied 11 03545 +
(1)
(1) The bars are made by the customer: for choice of bars, see pages B-26 and B-27.
DD384444.EPS
Mounting principle
b The fuses are installed on the horizontal bars which are in turn supported by a mounting plate b The front of the cubicle is made up of two parts: v 2/3 cut-out front plate allowing introduction of the fuses v 1/3 front plate support frame (12 modules) on which the functional units are mounted b The front may be covered either by a cover frame or a plain or transparent door b Current transformers can be installed behind ISFL fuse-switch disconnectors. Cat. no. selection
Device No. of No. of Mounting plate + horizontal devices vertical bars per row modules occupied 10 24 03546 + LV480870 (1) + LV480854 (1) 03546 (1) + (2) x 5 x 5
(2)
+ 03735 (3) + ISFL250 5 24 ISFL400 LV480868 x 2 ISFL630 (1) Adaptation accessories 49904 + 49852 used to: b install two ISFL160 devices on a mounting plate 03546 b mix ISFL devices. (2) The bars are made by the customer: for choice of bars, see page B-26. (3) The cat. number 03735 (IP20 front plate for ISFL, 185 mm between centres, W = 650 mm) replaces the cat. number 03733.
Accessories
Busbar barrier
DD384457.EPS
400E21222
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-53
Functional units
Fusegear
Fupact ISFL
Vertical 3P
Determining the busbars
Accessories
DD384445.EPS
Designation
Blanking plate for ISFL160 Blanking plate for ISFL250/630 (1) (1) Use 2 blanking plates per device.
Cat. no.
03740 03741
IP > 31 b b b b
A-54
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21222
Functional units
Fusegear
Fupact ISFT
Vertical 3P
Installation on mounting plate or busbars
Installation
Dd383589.eps
Device
ISFT100 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT100N (installation on mounting plate) ISFT160 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT250 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT400 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT630 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT100N (installation on busbars) ISFT160 (installation on busbars)
5 8 4 2 2 1 6 4
03320 03325 03321 03322 03323 03324 03325 03321 49869 x 2 03802 49869 x 2 49872 x 2 49875 x 2 49876 x 2
Accessories
Linergy FH for ISFT100 for 2 devices for 3 devices for 4 devices Coupler to connect 2 busbars Tooth cover Set of 3 connectors (25 to 95 mm) Set of 3 distribution connectors 3 x 10 mm
Dd383590.eps DD382484.eps
ISFT630.
Busbar connection
Connection made by the customer. Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection: see page B-64.
Connection
400E21221
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-55
Functional units
Fusegear
Fupact ISFT
Vertical 3P
Determining the busbars
IP > 31 510
IP > 31 450
IP > 31 b
A-56
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21221
Functional units
Fusegear
Fupact INF
Horizontal
Extended rotary handle
Installation
DD384452.EPS
Device
Mounting plate
Switch-disconnector fuses
H G F
E
D
C
INF32/40 INF63
B
INF100/160
A B C
DD384453.EPS
INF630-800
03540 03541 03541 03541 03541 03534 03534 03534 03534 03535 03535 03536 03536
03313 03314 03314 03314 03314 03727 03727 03727 03727 03729 03729 03730 03730
F
E
Busbar connection
DD384454.EPS
F
E
D
C
400E21220
49257 x 6 49257 x 8
D
C
Connection made by the customer. Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection for INF y 630 A: see page B-64.
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-57
Functional units
Fusegear
Fupact INF
Vertical
Extended rotary handle
Installation
DD381858.EPS
Device
Switch-disconnector fuses
H G
F
E
INF32/40
D
C
INF63
A B C
DD381859.EPS
INF630-800
3 3 5 5 5 5 9 9 9 9 9 9 11 11
03540 03540 03541 03541 03541 03541 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537
03312 03313 03314 03315 03315 03315 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728
49658 49658 x 2 49659 x 6 49659 x 8 03801 03801 03801 03801 03801 03801 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03803 03803
F
E
Busbar connection
DD381860.EPS
F
E
D
C
A-58
49257 x 6 49257 x 8
D
C
Connection made by the customer. Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection for INF y 630 A: see page B-64.
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21220
Functional units
Others
DD384603.eps
Presentation
Schneider Electric offers power factor correction equipment that integrates perfectly in Prisma P switchboards. The power factor correction modules are installed horizontally in a cubicle. The busbars are supplied by a protection device installed outside the cubicle. Special Prisma P cubicles are used for power factor correction, given the temperature rise inside the cubicles. They comply with and are tested according to standards IEC 61439-1 and 2.
Installation
Mounting plates ready to received the power factor correction modules, made up of a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars. They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added. Each cubicle can be equipped with up to 5 VarplusCan power factor correction modules or up to four VarplusCan with self power factor correction modules, positioned one above the other. The cubicle has a ventilated roof that can be equipped with two fans. The door has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a filter.
DD384604.eps
DD384605.eps
Cubicle with a 300 mm wide compartment for incoming cables via the top.
450E25000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-59
DD383660.eps
A-60
VarplusCan installation.
Others
Functional units
Device installation
DD384583.EPS
VarplusCan
Type of equipment
The following table indicates the maximum number of VarplusCan modules that can be installed vertically in one cubicle (D=400 mm or 600 mm) without exceeding temperature rise limits.
Prisma P cubicles can be used for installation of the new VarplusCan power factor correction modules designed to improve power system quality and reduce consumption of reactive energy. These modules are made up of capacitors, contactors and special protection against internal faults. It is necessary to select each devices to create the powerfactor correction module according to the Panelbuilder guide of Power Factor correction number PFCED111008EN. Then, the module can be installed inside Prisma switchboard thanks to the following Prisma mounting plate reference XXXXX.
Version : 3.0
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France
4 5
16/04/2013
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France
03979 03979
G FE D C B A
Power range
450E25000
(Figure 2).
Functional units
Others
Power factor correction equipment is mounted in special, 650 mm wide cubicles that are 400 or 600 mm deep. Standard cover panels are used. However, a special door is used (hinges on left only) that has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a filter. Designation
Door with cut-outs
Cat. no.
03970
When several cubicles are combined to build a form 2 switchboard, inter-cubicle partitions must be used. Cubicle depth Partition designation Cat. no.
400 mm Inter-cubicle partition, D = 400 mm 04911 600 mm Inter-cubicle partition, D = 600 mm 04931 (1) (1) For inter-cubicle partitioning of 600 mm depth cubicles, order partitions 04931 + 04911. Note: for further details, see page B-46.
A roof with a cut-out ensures forced ventilation of the equipment. It can also be equipped with one or two fans. It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust, condensation or falling objects. It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths. Selection guide Designation Front face cover Rear face cover Roof cover Configuration 200 kvar
Door fan IP55 rear panel IP30 2 natural airing devices without fan -
Cat. no.
08456 08656 NSYCVF575M230MF NSYCAC228RMF NSYCAG291LPF
Fan characteristics bb Power rating: 85 W bb Input voltage: 230 V bb Throughput via outlet grille: vv outlet grille: 350 m3/hr vv free with filter: 575 m3/hr bb Noise level: 64 dB.
450E25000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-61
Functional units
Others
Device
432 mm
03402
03803
Device
Modular rail
Device
TeSys U model
Dd381166.eps
Device
TeSys U model
TeSys U model TeSys U model (1)
(1) Version without communication module, auxiliary contact and reversing module.
A-62
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
400E21500
Functional units
Others
Device
ATS01N103/106FT ATS01N109/112FT ATS01N206 to 212 ATS01N222 to 232 ATS01N 230LY ATS01N 244LY ATS01N 244Q Width of devices:
On a modular rail
Useful length of rail (mm) 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm
DD383817.eps
Device
On a slotted plate
Width of devices:
Dd381169.eps
Device
LV/LV transformer
ABL6-TS/TD up to 2500 VA ABL6-RT up to 960 W ABL6-RF up to 480 W 03571 03804
LV/LV alimentation
4 4 03571 03571 03804 03804
400E21500
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
A-63
Functional system
Functional units
Others
Mounting
400 650 150
Metering
Devices No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] transparent or plain
Meter 3 Ph + N
2 6 03508 03343 [6] 03806 [6]
Connection block
2 6 03508 03343 [6] 03806 [6]
Mounting
400 650 150
DD383116.eps
Devices No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] transparent or plain
Meter 3 Ph + N
4 12 2 x 03508 2 x 03343 [6] 2 x 03806 [6]
A-64
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
DD383117.eps
401E21020
Functional units
Others
Metering
Installation
DD382954.eps
Device
Mounting plate
Adapter
Insulating plate
Ph + N
03157
03595
03154
400E21020
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-65
Functional units
Others
Metering
Installation
DD382952.eps
Device
Mounting plate
Adapter
Insulating plate
3 Ph + N
03152
03595
03154
A-66
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21020
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices
The human-switchboard interface mounting plates have been modified to ensure compatibility with the new front plates (catalogue numbers unchanged). The visor has also been changed to ensure compatibility with the new mounting plates. The old human-switchboard interface mounting plates and visor are not compatible with the new front plates.
Presentation
Device mounting
On an interface with plastic mounting plates, H = 150 mm (3 modules) The interface is made up of a metal front plate and plastic mounting plates that clip onto the front plate: b the devices are attached in the cut-outs of the plastic mounting plates and insulated from the front plate b a system at the rear of the mounting plates guides the wires b each mounting plate can receive an adhesive label b plain mounting plates are available to blank off any unused locations.
Dd381687.eps Dd381688.eps
Dd381705.eps
Dd381689.eps
On a metal front plate with cut-outs, H = 150 mm (3 modules) bb Devices are attached directly to the metal front plate bb Blanking plates are available to blank off any unused locations bb Economical solution.
Installation in a switchboard
The mounted assembly can be installed: b in the device zone of enclosures and cubicles, like a front plate b on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle b on a partial door with cut-outs in wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures (except IP55). The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
Note: to maintain the IP55 degree of protection, the measurement devices must be installed behind a transparent door. If they are installed on a plain door, use the corresponding mounting plates.
Dd383642.eps Dd381684.eps
60 40 10 0
60 40 10 0
60 40 10 0
60 40 10 0
400E21080
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-67
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices
72 x 72 mm measurement devices
Dd381705.eps
Cat. no.
03904 03902 03900
Dd382575.eps
The plain plastic mounting plates have knock-outs: b 4 holes, 16 mm diameter b 5 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm
Dd381689.eps
Cat. no.
03910 03907
Dd382637.eps
96 x 96 mm measurement devices
Dd382632.eps
Cat. no.
03904 03903 (1) 03901
Dd382633.eps
The plain plastic mounting plates have knock-outs: b 4 holes, 16 mm diameter b 5 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm b 1 hole, 72 x 72 mm
A-68
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21080
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices
96 x 96 mm measurement devices
Dd381711.eps
Cat. no.
03911 03908
The blanking plates have knock-outs: b 3 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm b 1 hole, 72 x 72 mm.
DD383662.eps
Cat. no.
03913
The human-switchboard interface mounting plates have been modified to ensure compatibility with the new front plates (catalogue numbers unchanged). The visor has also been changed to ensure compatibility with the new mounting plates. The old human-switchboard interface mounting plates and visor are not compatible with the new front plates.
Dd382636.eps
Presentation A visor can be used to incline 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm devices by 30. The devices are mounted on a cut-out plastic mounting plate (see previous page) that clips directly to the visor. The visor can be installed on 300 and 400 mm wide doors with cut-outs in cubicles or on partial doors with cut-outs, in wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures. It is supplied with a drilling diagram for mounting on a plain door. Cat. no. selection
Visor
Dd380862.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
03928
40 10 0
60
40 10 0
60
40 10 0
60
40 10 0
60
40 10 0
60
400E21080
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-69
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
144 x 144 mm devices 22.2 mm diameter lamps, pushbuttons
Installation Devices are installed in the device compartment on a metal front plate with cut-outs. Blanking plates clip onto the unused 72 x 72 mm holes. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
03912 03907
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 4 modules (for one 144 x 144 mm device + four 72 x 72 mm devices) Blanking plate (for 72 x 72 mm hole)
Dd382635.eps
The blanking plates have knock-outs (22 mm diameter) to install: b 1 to 2 lamps or pushbuttons b 1 switch b 1 emergency off (EPO) pushbutton.
Pushbuttons or lamps
Installation In the device compartment on a metal front plate with cut-outs. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
03914
Metal front plate with knock-outs (2 modules) for twelve 22 mm diameter lamps or pushbuttons
A-70
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21080
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
Powerlogic system
Dd383019.eps
Device
Power meter PM
03911 03911
DD381716.eps
Device
Mounting plate
Circuit monitor CM
4 6
03571 03572
03918 03918
03804 03806
Device
com
Digipa
ct DMB3
00
DMB300 DMC300/400
DMB300/400
3 4
03916 03917
1 2 3 4
select
Device
com
Alarm
Digipa
ct DM
C300
DC150 data concentrator + SC150 indication and control module CLS150, UM100, IM100 (72 x 72 mm cases)
Digipact
03571
03804
03917.
DD384028.eps
400E21080
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-71
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
Vigilohm system
Dd381754.eps
MERLIN
Vigirex RM12
GERIN
IM400 or XM300C
Vigilohm
with 3 XD301 or with 2 XD312 or with XD301 + XD312 XLI300 or XTU300 or XD308C with XL308 or with XL316
03930
03932
03931
03933
XML308/316 or XM300C
03931
03933
03931 + 03933.
Vigilohm
Dd381699.eps
60 40 10 0
Vigilohm
4 3 3 4
Vigirex
Dd381720.eps
MERLIN
GERIN
Test
Test no trip
RH10/RH21/RH99 relays Modular device 72 x 72 mm cases RHU relay (72 x 72 mm cases) RMH relay and RM12T multiplexer RMH (modular devices) RM12T (72 x 72 mm cases)
Vigirex
03401
03203
03401
03203
A-72
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E21080
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
03401 03401
03202 03203
Transparent front plate, 4 modules, H = 200 mm Transparent front plate, 6 modules, H = 300 mm Transparent front plate, 9 modules, H = 450 mm Transparent front plate, 12 modules, H = 600 mm
400E21080
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-73
Functional units
Others
Human-switchboard interface
Cable running
DD384630.eps
Cable trunking for doors, W = 2000 mm Flexible trunking for wiring to door Linergy MS auxiliaries terminal block 10 IN/20 out 10 grommets for wiring through front
Dd381641.eps DD384372.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
04233 04235 04228 04234
DD381644.eps
Dd383653.eps
Grommets.
A duct for four conductors, 1755 mm long, for the distribution of auxiliary voltages from the power and regulation devices to the automatic relay, control and indication systems. Composition b Insulating duct. b Four brass conductors offering 166 tap-off points per linear meter via 6.35 mm tab terminals. b Two clamps for mounting on cable-tie supports. b One lateral clamp. Characteristics bb Rated insulation level: Ui = 660 V. bb Rated operational current (40 C): 32 A. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
04203
A-74
Version : 3.0
18/04/2013
400E21080
Functional units
Others
Reserve space
Cat. no.
03801 03802 03803 03804 03805 03806 03807 03808
DD381582.eps
Cat. no.
03342 03343 03344 03345
Dd383121.eps
Cat. no.
03228 03229
Cat. no.
03811 03812 03813 03814 03815 03816 03817
DD381585.eps
Cat. no.
03352 03353 03354
400E21050
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-75
Functional units
Others
Fixing accessories
These nuts are used to install various devices (contactors, transformers) on a slotted mounting plate. They can also be installed on the cable-tie supports in enclosures and cubicles, as well as on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles. Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates M4 M5 M6 03180 03181 03182
These nuts are used to install various devices on a modular rail. Designation
20 clip-nuts for modular rails M4 M5 M6
Cat. no.
03164 03165 03166
These nuts can be installed on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles, as well as on the functional uprights in IP30/55 wall-mounted and floorstanding enclosures. Designation Cat. no.
20 M6 captive nuts 03194
DD381576.eps
Pratic raiser
Colour RAL 9001. The raiser clips onto a slotted mounting plate or a modular rail. It is 27 mm wide and serves to raise a device 10 mm. It is made of an insulating material and can directly receive terminal blocks, modular devices, etc. Designation Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers 04224
DD381314.eps
A-76
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00135
Functional units
Others
Fixing accessories
Hexagonal spacers
Designation
M5 hexagonal spacers 4 spacers H = 9 mm H = 23 mm H = 55 mm M6 hexagonal spacers 4 spacers H = 9 mm H = 23 mm H = 25 mm H = 55 mm M8 hexagonal spacers 4 spacers H = 40 + 10 mm
Dd380828.eps
Cat. no.
03185 03186 03187 03195 03196 03198 03197 03199
The angle brackets are used to install terminal blocks, trunking, etc. Designation Cat. no.
4 angle brackets + screws 2 universal angle brackets 6 universal inserts System P 6 universal angle brackets
DD383657.eps DD381577.eps DD382920.eps
03581
03582
03583
400E00135
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-77
Functional units
Others
Prisma G adapter
Prisma G adapter
DD381603.eps
Kit with four lateral and two longitudinal cross-members that can be depth adjusted. It is used to install Prisma G components, notably the functional mounting plates, the Linergy BW insulated busbars and the 400 A rear Linergy BSbusbars. It is the means to enhance the flexibility of the Prisma P system. It is available in two widths: b 500 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment W = 650 mm) b 250 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment W = 400 mm). Cat. no. selection Designation
Prisma G adapter, W= 500 Prisma G adapter, W= 250 Note: the adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030.
Dd383591.eps
Cat. no.
03595 03596
The Linergy BW busbars can be positioned to the left, middle or right of the modular row. Depth adjustable, the busbars can be supplied by an Compact INS switch-disconnector or a fixed/withdrawable Compact NSX circuit breaker, whatever the type of operating system (toggle, rotary handle, motor mechanism). For Linergy BW busbars, order two adapters (03595 x 2).
A-78
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00135
Functional units
Others
Other devices
Universal cross-members
Dd381173.eps
Dd381316.eps
Cat. no.
03584 03586 03587
400E00135
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-79
Functional units
Others
Other devices
Dd381174.eps
Plain backplate
Metal plain backplate, H = 1780 mm for 36 modules cubicle. Supplied with four angle brackets and two slide rails to facilitate mounting. The four angle brackets can be replaced by two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for depth adjustment. There are two wides b 510 mm wide for installation in a device compartment W = 650 mm or W = 800 mm (650 + 150) b 660 mm wide for installation for a cubicle W = 800 mm. Cat. no. selection Designation
Plain backplate, 36 modules 510 mm wide Plain backplate, 36 modules 660 mm wide
Cat. no.
03570 03569
For the installation and depth adjustment of plain backplates and slotted mounting plates. Cat. no. selection Designation
Set of 2 slide rails + angle brackets
Cat. no.
03593
A-80
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00135
Functional units
Others
Other devices
Dd381175.eps
Galvanised, slotted metal mounting plate, supplied with four lateral cross-members. Installation b either in the device zone on the four lateral cross-members (depth adjustment is possible) b or vertically at the rear of a cable compartment, W = 300 mm (03571) or W = 400 mm (03572). In this case, use four universal angle brackets. Cat. no. selection Designation
Slotted mounting plate + 4 lateral cross-members H = 200 mm (4 modules) H = 300 mm (6 modules) 2 universal angle brackets
Cat. no.
03571 03572 03581
Dd381427.eps
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate Cat. number H (mm) W (mm) 03571 180 480 03572 280 480
Slotted mounting plate, H = 200 mm, installed vertically in a cable compartment, W = 300 mm, using four universal angle brackets. The height occupied is 600 mm (12 modules).
Dd381178.eps
Galvanised metal, slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm. Supplied with four angle brackets, they connect directly to the rear of a framework, W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150 mm). The mounting plate can also be installed using two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for depth adjustment. Cat. no. selection Designation
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm (12 modules)
Dd381177.eps
Cat. no.
03574
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm, installed on slide rails (03593 x 2).
400E00135
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
A-81
Functional units
Others
Other devices
Modular rails
Dd380505.eps
Modular rail
Cat. no.
03401 03402 04226
Modular rail 432 Modular rail (adjustable) 432 2 modular rails, with 4 holes, 1600 dia. 6.4 mm, 450 mm between centres
Dd381180.eps Dd381187.eps
Designation
Modular device rail, W = 650 mm (supplied with two angle brackets for mounting on the framework)
Dd381355.eps
Cat. no.
03590
A-82
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00135
Functional units
Others
Switchboard lighting
Switchboard lighting
DD384098.eps
This system is generally used to illuminate the front of a switchboard. The kit is made up of: b a base b a neon tube b a front plate with cut-out (1 module) b a door contact. Characteristics b supply voltage: 220/240 V b power rating: 8 W. Cat. no. selection Designation
Switchboard lighting
No. of modules
1
Cat. no.
08964
Installation in a cubicle.
Lamp with a magnetic base for installation behind a door or directly on the cubicle framework. Supplied without a power cord. It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard. Designation Cat. no.
Switchboard portable lamp 08965
400E21090
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
A-83
Distribution
Contents
Main distribution
Presentation of Linergy LGYE busbars 630 A to 4000 A Presentation of Linergy LGY busbars 630 A to 3200 A Presentation of Linergy LGY busbars Presentation of Linergy BS busbar Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A Horizontal busbars up to 4000 A Lateral Linergy LGY busbars up to 3200 A Lateral busbars up to 4000 A
Linergy LGY bars Linergy LGYE bars Linergy LGYE bars Horizontal and lateral busbars Lateral busbars
B-7
B-7
Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A Linergy accessories Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A Horizontal busbars up to 3200 A
Linergy BS bars 10 mm thick Busbars 5 mm thick Busbars 10 mm thick For 300 mm width framework Linergy BS bars 5 mm thick Mounting hardware - Markers
Rear Linergy BS busbars up to 1600 A - Busbars, 5 mm thick Form 1 electrical switchboards Form 2 partitioning Form 3 partitioning Form 4 partitioning Other partitions
Covering the supply terminals on the incoming device
400 A rear Linergy BS busbars Linergy DX distribution block Linergy DP distribution block 160/630 A Linergy BS multi-stage distribution block Linergy FM distribution block Linergy FC distribution block Insulated flexible bars Connection accessories Busbar accessories Linergy TR
Mounting hardware Cable-tie supports
Secondary distribution
B-50
B-53 B-55 B-58 B-59 B-60 B-62 B-64 B-65 B-67 B-69
B-67 B-65
Introduction B-69 Terminal blocks B-70 Adjustable earth + neutral Linergy TB terminal blocks Spring or screw technology B-72 B-75
B-76
Linergy TB earth bars Linergy TB neutral bars Linergy PE conductor Linergy PEN conductor
Enclosures C-1 Additional information D-1 400E50020 Version : 2.1 16/04/2013 B-1
Linergy LGYE
Putting the latest technological innovation in your hands
B-2
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22600
Linergy LGYE
a breakthrough in busbar systems
Safe, reliable, exible, and exible with the highest level of performance
Schneider Electrics Prisma PTM is one of the leading switchboard enclosure systems on the market. Designed for use with Prisma P, the new Linergy LGYETM busbar system now includes horizontal busbars, for greater electrical switchboard enclosure performance, reliability, and costeffectiveness. Manufactured using a revolutionary process, patented Linergy LGYE busbars are unique on the market, taking your electrical switchboard installations a giant leap into the future.
Discover how Linergy LGYE can place the next generation of low-voltage switchboards in your hands.
400E22600
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-3
Innovative technology
from an energy expert you can trust
Patented Linergy LGYE is backed by Schneider Electrics decades of expertise in electrical distribution systems and is certified IEC61439-2 compliant by ASEFA.
B-4
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22600
A revolutionary design
for greater efficiency
The Linergy LGYE line now includes horizontal busbars, helping you achieve better electrical switchboard performance while optimizing busbar layout and facilitating assembly.
Schneider ElectricTM has drawn upon 30 years of expertise in electrical distribution systems and a decade of hands-on experience with the proven and reliable Linergy line of products. It brings you a revolutionary design featuring a high-quality copper contact surface that delivers even better results than traditional Linergy BS-to-Linergy BS connections. Linergy LGYE busbars offer a number of benets to help you enhance performance and boost your competitiveness.
Attractive
The revolutionary copper contact strips, anodized aluminum surface, and unique shapes give a modern appearance and a soft touch.
IEC standardscompliant
The latest standards were factored in from the early design stages to ensure that temperatures are kept below the IEC61439-2 standard requirements, for optimal performance regardless of the switchboard conguration.
Lightweight
Linergy is half the weight of equivalent-rated Linergy BS bars for more fuel-efcient transport, easier handling, and smoother installation.
Environmentallyfriendly
Instead of increasingly-scarce copper, Linergy LGYE is made from 70 % recycled raw materials offering the same performance as primary raw materials.
Higher-capacity
A single Linergy LGYE bar can withstand ratings up to 4000 A. It would take two or three Linergy BS bars per pole to achieve similar ratings.
Cost-effective
Linergy LGYE helps you achieve cost savings now and provides protection against uctuating copper prices in the future, plus all the advantages of a raw material that is easy to purchase and store.
Linergy LGYE is
Reduce costs
400E22600
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-5
evolving!
Linergy LGYE is a full-featured busbar system that includes all the connections, screws, bolts, isolating supports, and other accessories you need for drill-free assembly.
Distribution
Main distribution
NEW
PD384623.eps
Light Economical
H H
H H
H H
G G
G G
F F
H H
H H
G G
F F
400E22610
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
C C
C C
B-7
Distribution
Main distribution
The Linergy LGYE solution is based on: b the Linergy y 1600 A busbar concept (approved technology, trusted by industry specialists) b the already existing flat busbar mounting method (th. = 5 mm and 10 mm).
630 A.
DD384539.eps DD384540.eps
800 A.
1000 A.
1200 A.
DD385312.eps DD384542.eps
1600 A.
2000 A.
DD384543.eps DD384544.eps
2500 A.
3200 A.
4000 A.
B-8
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E22610
Installation The Linergy LGYE busbar can be installed either at the top or the bottom of a frame. b Size for 630 to 2500 A: 150 mm. b Size for 3200 to 4000 A: 200 mm. The mounting technique is the same as that for the Linergy BS busbar, sparing the installer any constraints. Busbar type b Horizontal busbar: v Functionalized profiled busbar L = 2000 mm v for 630 to 2500 A busbars, a single strip is incorporated over the entire length v for 3200 to 4000 A busbars, a double strip is incorporated over the entire length.
Dd384518.EPS
Flexibility for upgrading existing switchboards It is possible to mount the Linergy LGYE busbar vertically for all ratings from 2000 to 4000 A. Busbar type b Vertical busbar: v functionalized profiled busbar L = 2000 mm to be re-cut to 1675 mm for connection with horizontal busbar from 1600 to 2500 A. Installation in duct W = 150 mm v functionalized profiled busbar L = 2000 mm to be re-cut to 1620 mm for connection with horizontal busbar from 3200 to 4000 A.Installation in duct W = 300 mm v for 2000 to 2500 A busbars, a single strip is incorporated over the entire height v for 3200 to 4000 A busbars, a double strip is incorporated over the entire height. NB: this busbar does not allow the use of Prisma P system prefabricated connections.
400E22610
DD384555.EPS
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
B-9
Distribution
Main distribution
PD391305_SE.eps
Linergy LGY busbars are installed in a busbar zone to the left or right of the device zone. The busbars are secured to the framework by supports that maintain the distances between busbars. All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the switchboard. The bars are channelled and the devices, installed on either side, can be connected at any height, without drilling.
All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the switchboard.
Prefabricated connections supply the devices mounted to the left or right of the busbars.
B-10
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E22610
PD390568R.eps
Channelled busbars
Linergy LGY channelled busbars implement advanced technology and are made of aluminium, a material widely used for electrical conduction. Ductile and malleable, aluminium can be used to create complex shapes that improve electrical conduction, rigidity, ventilation and appearance.
Ergonomic shape
The low density of aluminium and its malleability make it possible to produce hightech sections offering both exceptional rigidity and minimum weight. Twice as light as copper for the same current ratings, the busbars can held easily in one. What is more, their shape is ideal for handling and installation.
The manufacturing process allows great flexibility in terms of the shape, notably for the creation of internal partitions that increase the current-flow perimeter. In this way, busbar efficiency is optimised and external dimensions reduced. As a result, up to 1600 A, these channelled busbars can be installed in compartments just 150 mm wide and 400 mm deep.
The ease and flexibility of the extrusion process makes it possible to create closed and ribbed sections offering exceptional rigidity. Two supports spaced over the bars and one at the bottom are sufficient to cover most installation needs (Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s).
The increased heat exchange surface enhances the natural convection of the bars. The bars are anodised to enhance emission and radiation, and thus the evacuation of heat. Whatever the switchboard configuration, the bars maintain their performance level.
Designed to resist ageing and creep, the busbar supports, made of a heat-setting, insulating material, offer a particularly high level of performance, notably their withstand to high temperatures. Their remarkable mechanical withstand means fewer are required, thus freeing maximum space along the busbars for the connection of devices.
PD390413R.eps
The same support is used for all busbars up to 1600 A and can also be used as the bottom support. As a result, ordering is easy and stocking costs are reduced.
PD384623.eps
Tested in special test stations, copper connections are used to interconnect two sets of busbars. Connections are fast with 10 mm thick horizontal busbars. Drilling is not required; the connections are made by clamping the busbars.
PD390415R.eps
A copper powder is thermally projected at high speed along the entire length of the bar. It forms a rough, exceptionally hard surface. The quality of the electrical connection is enhanced by the many contact points. The result is convincing and even better than a traditional copper/copper connection.
Modern busbars
Linergy LGY busbars are produced in a number of different shapes offering both a high level of performance and good appearance. The anodisation process protects against ageing and provides an attractive finish.. The copper-coloured bands along the entire length reflect the modern design and high technology of these busbars.
400E22610
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
B-11
Distribution
Main distribution
Type of busbar Very rigid profile to improve withstand to electrodynamic forces. Connection points accessible from the front and adjustable from top to bottom. Compatible with all Prisma prefabricated connections. Installation Can be installed independently on either the left or right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework (650 + 150 mm) for distribution on either side. For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the device zone are sufficient to maintain the bars. A third support is required as the bottom support for the bars.
Dd382326.eps
Installation Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide (650 + 150 mm). They must be interconnected by three equipotential links. Generally speaking, these links are provided by: b the horizontal busbars b connections in the middle and at the bottom of the vertical busbars.
DD382327R.eps
Horizontal-busbar connections
DD382576.eps
B-12
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22620
Distribution
Main distribution
v Horizontal and lateral busbars up to 3200 A require the same amount of space. b horizontal busbars v Linergy BS bars without holes, W = 2000 mm, 5 mm thick v Linergy BS bars without holes, W = 2000 mm, 10 mm thick b lateral busbars v Linergy BS bars with holes, W = 1675 mm, 5 mm thick v Linergy BS bars with holes, W = 1675 mm, 10 mm thick
Horizontal Linergy BS busbar for switchboards up to 3200 A. Adapts to all Linergy LGY 1600 A profiles and also to the lateral Linergy LGYE busbar.
Type of busbar Linergy BS busbars with holes, 5 mm thick (up to 1600 A). Linergy BS busbars with holes, 10 mm thick (up to 2500 A). Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length of the busbars. Prisma P prefabricated connections cannot be used with these busbars. Installation Can be installed independently on either the left or right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework for distribution on either side. Three fixed supports (04661) are mandatory. When more than three supports are required (see the tables for busbar calculations on the following pages), use free supports (04662). Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).
Dd383709.EPS
Lateral Lienrgy BS busbar for switchboards up to 3200 A. Adapts to all profiles of the horizontal Linergy LGYE busbar.
400E22620
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-13
Distribution
Main distribution
The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). For more information on other ambient temperatures, see page D-21.
Busbar calculation
1250 1650
1050 1480
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. Note: for a L = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below.
Linergy LGYE
Cat. No.
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 630 530 800 1000 1250 1650 680 850 1050 1480 1 1+1
For frames L = 300 mm and 400 mm, only the first support is fixed.
Busbar selection
DD384520.EPS
DD384539.eps
DD384540.eps
Dimensions
Cat. No.
04560 04561 04562 04563 04564
DD384631.eps
60 23
B-14
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22630
Distribution
Main distribution
Dd381226.eps
Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free supports. Cat. No.
04662. Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS 04664 04662
04664.
Dd381225.eps
DD384535.EPS
Designation
Linergy LGYE horizontal joint 1600 A 3P 4P
Cat. No.
04620 x 3 04620 x 4 + 04624 (1)
(1) 04624 is mandatory in case of jointed 4P Linergy LGYE busbars installations and must be installed only at the junction on side-by-side frameworks combination. Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.
04620.
DD384615.eps
04624.
Busbar dimensions
DD384534.EPS
Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars
400E22630
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-15
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-21.
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 2000 1650 2440 3200 3620 2100 2800 3350 2 2+1 2+2
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. Note: for a L = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below.
Linergy LGYE
Cat. No.
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 2000 1650 2440 3200 3620 2100 2800 3350 1 1+1
For frames L = 300 mm and 400 mm, only the first support is fixed.
DD384533.EPS
DD384543.eps
Busbar selection
DD385312.eps
DD384542.eps
Dimensions
Cat. No.
04566 04567 04568
DD384632.eps
04565
100 31 150 31
Dd381226.eps
Dd381225.eps
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free supports. Designation Cat. No.
04662. Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy 2500 A LGYE/BS 3200 A Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy 2500 A LGYE/BS 3200 A 12 spacers 150 mm for Linergy LGYE profile 3200 - 4000 A 04664 + 04671 04664 + 04646 04662 + 04671 04662 + 04646 04646
04664.
DD384633.eps
B-16
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22630
Distribution
Main distribution
DD384588.EPS
Cat. No.
04621 x 3 04623 x 3 04621 x 4 + 04624 (1) 04623 x 4 + 04624 (1)
(1) 04624 is mandatory in case of jointed 4P Linergy LGYE busbars installations and must be installed only at the junction on side-by-side frameworks combination. Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.
04623.
DD384614.eps
04624.
Busbar dimensions
DD384558.EPS
Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars y 2500 A Top or bottom horizontal busbars u 3200 A
400E22630
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-17
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). Above 1600 A, the busbars must be doubled and installed in two busbar sections, side by side. In this case, they must be interconnected by three equipotential links. For more information on other ambient temperatures, see page D-25.
Linergy 630 04502 Linergy 800 04503 Linergy 1000 04504 Linergy 1250 04505 Linergy 1600 04506 Double busbars Linergy 2000 04504 x 2 Linergy 2500 04505 x 2 Linergy 3200 04506 x 2
3 4 5 7 8
2x3
2x4
2x5
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
DD381232.eps
DD381234.eps
DD381235.eps
DD381236.eps
DD381237.eps
Note: in a combined arrangement with the Linergy LGYE 3200 A and 4000 A horizontal busbars, re-cutting of the bar to 1620 mm is recommended. Busbars up to 1600 A. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
B-18
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22210
Distribution
Main distribution
DD381509.eps
Supports are used to install busbars to the left or right of the device zone. They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware. Designation Cat. no.
Busbar supports 12 chocks for Linergy LGY busbars
DD380741.eps DD380742.eps
04651 01109
Double busbars up to 3200 A. Install three equipotential links between the busbars (voir page B-12).
Busbar supports.
DD384557.EPS
These connections are used to connect Linergy LGYE horizontal busbars to lateral Linergy LGY busbars up to 1600 A. Supplied with mounting hardware. Cat. No.
Linergy LGYE vertical connection 1600 A Linergy LGYE vertical shifted connection 1600 A (1) (1) To be used when using horizontal connection in 150 mm duct. (2) A single connection by reference. 04602 (2) 04603 (2)
Dedicated connection 04603 for Linergy LGYE busbar in 150 mm duct with horizontal jointing.
These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to lateral Linergy LGY busbars. Supplied with mounting hardware. Designation Cat. no.
Connection 1000 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04634 (1) Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04635 (1) 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636 (1) width or horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 (1) + 04642 (1) Catalogue numbers 04634, 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
400E22210
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-19
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). For more information on other ambient temperatures, see page D-24.
W = 300 mm
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 630 530 800 680 1000 1250 1650 2000 2440 3200 3620 850 1050 1480 1650 2100 2800 3350 3 3+2 3+4 3+6
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. Note: up to 2500 A, installation in 300 mm width cubicles is recommended (150 mm is possible); for 3200/4000 A, installation in 300 mm width cubicles is mandatory.
Busbar selection
DD384607.eps DD384550.eps
DD384552.eps
DD384553.eps
Bar 1000 A. Bar 1250 A. Bar 1600 A. Cat. no. Cat. no. Cat. no. 04564 04562 04563 Linergy LGYE busbars are supplied in W = 2000 mm. For a lateral installation, the recommended bar length is 1675 mm.
Dimensions
Cat. No.
04560 04561 04562 04563 04564 04565 04566 04567 04568
DD384631.eps
60 23
Busbars up to 4000 A. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Note: for mounting with the Linergy LGYE horizontal busbar, it is recommended to re-cut the Linergy LGYE vertical busbar as indicated below: Rating horizontal busbars 630 to 1600 A 2000 to 2500 A 3200 to 4000 A Rating re-cuts 1675 mm 1675 mm 1625 mm
DD384632.eps
100 31 150 31
DD384633.eps
B-20
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22640
Distribution
Main distribution
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Cat. no.
04661 04661 + 04671 04661 + 04646 04662
Busbars chocks
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.It is not considered a busbar support. Designation Cat. no.
12 spacers 150 mm for Linergy LGYE profile u 3200 A 12 stops/1600 A bottom support Linergy LGYE 12 stops/4000 A bottom support Linergy LGYE Bottom lateral busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Support mounting hardware for bars > 80 mm Linergy LGYE/BS
DD384577.EPS
DD384576.EPS
DD384579.EPS
400E22640
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-21
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar connections
These connections are used to connect Linergy LGYE horizontal busbars up to 4000 A to lateral Linergy LGYE busbars. Supplied with mounting hardware. Designation Cat. No.
Linergy LGYE vertical short connection 2500 A Linergy LGYE vertical long connection 2500 A Linergy LGYE vertical connection 4000 A 04604 04605 04607
DD384559.EPS
B-22
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22640
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). Busbars are installed in cubicles 650 or 800 mm wide, whatever the depth. For more information on other ambient temperatures and on the depth available for devices, see 25 C, page D-23.
Cat. no.
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Dd381241.eps
Cat. no. selection See the table below. Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
DD381233.eps DD381234.eps DD381235.eps
DD381236.eps
DD381237.eps
Busbar supports
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
The bottom support maintains the bars in position. They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware. Designation
Linergy LGY rear busbar support 12 chocks for Linergy LGY busbars
Dd381242.eps Dd381243.eps
Cat. no.
04652 01109
Busbar supports.
400E22220
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-23
Distribution
Main distribution
DD384611.EPS
These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars to vertical rear Linergy busbars. Designation
Linergy LGYEvertical connection 1600 A
Cat. no.
04602
Dd381244.eps
These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to vertical rear Linergy LGY busbars. Designation Cat. no.
Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04635 (1) (2) 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636 (1) (2) width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 (2) + 04642 (1) (1) A part of the connection must be made. (2) Catalogue numbers 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
B-24
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22220
Distribution
Mounting hardware
Linergy accessories
Mounting hardware Markers
Presentation
b For secure connections, without drilling: b Linergy bolts clip into the channel of the busbar b they can slide along the entire length of the busbar b they cannot fall to the bottom of the switchboard because they are held in place by the ball in the head, thus facilitating connections b a mark at the end of the bolt indicates whether the bolt is correctly positioned b 8.8 class hardware guarantees withstand to tightening torques and to premature ageing of the electrical contact. Composition of sets: b set of hardware including 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers.
Linergy hardware
DD381218.eps
Dd381221.eps
Dd381220.eps
Cat. no.
04766 (1) 04767 (2)
(1) Cable lug connected to Linergy busbar using bolt (04766) (compatible with Linergy Evolution and Linergy). (2) Copper bar connected to Linergy busbar using bolt (04767) (compatible with Linergy only). 04766. 04767.
Flat washers
Dd381219.eps
Presentation These washers, sold separately, are required for connection of flexible bars to Linergy busbars. They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper. Composition of sets: b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts. Cat. no. selection Designation
20 M8/diameter 20 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 24 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 28 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY
Cat. no.
04772 04773 04774
Conducting washers
Dd383122.eps
Flat washers For M8 bold and lugs y 25 mm, 20 mm external diameter. Composition of sets: b set of 20 flat washers. Designation
20 M8/diameter 20 mm flat washers for lugs < 25 Linergy LGY
Cat. no.
04775
Connection cross-section
Markers
Dd381222.eps
Designation
Set of 12 phase markers for Linergy LGY/LGYE profile Linergy LGYE busbar screw plate kit after sales service
Cat. no.
04794 01130
400E22230
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-25
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports attached to the framework. The tables opposite indicate: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of busbar supports for each type of framework, depending on: v the size of the busbars v the rated short-time withstand current Icw. For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-22.
IP y 31 IP > 31 800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
Number of supports
y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 1 bar, 60 x 5 1 bar, 80 x 5 2 bars, 60 x 5 2 2+1 2 bars, 80 x 5 W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2 W = 400 mm All sizes 1 2 Note: for a W = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below. W = 650 mm W = 650 + 150 mm
Busbar selection
Dd381223.eps
Designation
04536 04538
Cat. no.
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd381226.eps Dd381225.eps
04664 04662
Joints
Dd381227.eps
Joint for 50/60 mm bar/Linergy BS horizontal busbar Joint for 80/100 mm bar/Linergy BS horizontal busbar
Designation
W = 60 mm W = 80 mm
04640 04641
Cat. no.
Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.
04640.
Dd381228.eps
Busbar calculation
Type of busbars
B-26
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22100
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports attached to the framework. The tables opposite indicate: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of busbar supports for each type of framework, depending on: v the size of the busbars v the rated short-time withstand current Icw. For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-22.
IP > 31
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 2050 1850 2 bars, 50 x 10 2300 2000 2 bars, 60 x 10 2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10 3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10 Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard.
Number of supports
y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 2+2 1 bar, 80 x 10 2 bars, 50 x 10 2 2+1 2 bars, 60 x 10 2 bars, 80 x 10 2 bars, 100 x 10 2 2+1 W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2 W = 400 mm All sizes 1 2 Note: for a W = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below. W = 650 mm W = 650 + 150 mm
Busbar selection
Dd381229.eps
Cat. no.
04545 04546 04548 04550
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free support. Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Width y 80 mm Linergy LGYE/BS Width > 80 mm Free 5/10 mm busbar support Width y 80 mm Linergy LGYE/BS Width > 80 mm
Dd381226.eps Dd381225.eps
Icw 50 kA eff / 1 s.
Dd381231.eps
04664.
04662.
Joints
Designation
Cat. no.
Joint for 50/60 mm bar/Linergy BS Width 50 and 60 mm 04640 horizontal busbar Joint for 80/100 mm bar/Linergy BS Width 80 and 100 mm 04641 horizontal busbar Note: when installed, at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.
04641.
Dd381228.eps
Busbar calculation
Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars
400E22100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-27
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. The bars rest on a bottom support. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required in a cubicle, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw).
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 20 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 7 5 3 1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
Busbar selection
DD380724.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
04516 04518
Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps
04661 04662
04661.
04662.
Busbar chocks
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s. The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports and two free supports.
The bottom support maintains the bars in position. It is not considered a busbar support. Designation
DD380728.eps
Cat. no.
04663
Note: When connecting 5 mm flat bars to horizontal busbars, part no. 04663 is not required.
B-28
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22310
Distribution
Main distribution
Horizontal-busbar connections
DD383844.eps
For busbars with 75 mm between centres, the bars must fully overlap.
DD383399.eps
Prefabricated connection
These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick, to lateral Linergy LGY busbars or Linergy BS busbars. Supplied with mounting hardware.
To satisfy safety clearances, the assembly points on adjacent bars must be staggered as shown above. Connection 1000 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile
Designation
Cat. No.
04634 (1) 04635 (1)
DD381239.eps
(1) Catalogue numbers 04634, 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
400E22310
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-29
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. The bars rest on a bottom support. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required in a cubicle, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). Above 2800 A (2500 A with IP > 31), the busbars must be doubled and installed in two busbar sections, side by side. In this case, they must be interconnected by three equipotential links.
IP y 31 IP > 31 1200 1080 1400 1250 1800 1600 2050 1850 2300 2000 2820 2500 Double busbars 3200 2820
3+2
3+4
3+6
2x3
2x3+2
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
Busbar selection
Dd381497.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
04525 04526 04528
Busbar supports
Busbars y 1600 A (IP y 31).
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports.
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd381498.eps Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
04661 04662
04661.
04662.
Busbar chocks
The bottom support maintains the bars in position. It is not considered a busbar support. Designation
DD381124.eps
Cat. no.
04663
Busbars up to 3200 A.
Horizontal-busbar connections
Dd381499.eps
Horizontal busbars
Vertical busbars
Cat. no.
B-30
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22310
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. The bars rest on a bottom support. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required in a cubicle, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw).
3+2
3+4
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 3+4 3+6 2150 1900 1 bar, 100 x 10 mm 3 2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3+2 3+4 3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10 mm Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard.
Busbar supports
Dd383193.eps
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy Width y 80 mm LGYE/BS Width > 80 mm Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Width y 80 mm Width > 80 mm
Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps
04661.
04662.
Busbar chocks
The bottom support maintains the bars in position. It is not considered a busbar support. Designation
Bottom lateral 5/10 mm busbar support W300 Linergy LGYE/BS all bars 5 mm width 1 bar. 80 x 10 mm 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm Bottom support for busbar 100 x 10 mm
DD383194.eps
Cat. no.
04666
04666 + 04661
Horizontal-busbar connections
DD383844.eps DD384320.eps
For busbars with 75 mm between centres, the bars must fully overlap.
50/60/80/100
DD383399.eps
Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick. Horizontal bars (mm) 50 60 80 100
To satisfy safety clearances, the assembly points on adjacent bars must be staggered as shown above.
80 2 2 3 -
100 2 2 3 4
400E22310
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-31
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars rest on one of the fixed supports. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-26.
Bars / phase
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 3+4 3 1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 3+2 1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard. A set of busbars made up of two 80 x 5 mm bars per phase must be installed in a cubicle 600 mm deep.
Busbar selection
DD380729.eps
Designation
04516 04518
Cat. no.
Busbar supports
Designation
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports.
Linergy BS rear vertical support for 5/10 mm bar Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
DD380732.eps DD381652.eps
04653 04662
Cat. no.
04653.
04662.
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s. and maintains the position of the bar. The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x 04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support and maintains the position of the bar. Designation Cat. no.
100 metallic spacer thickness 5 mm Linergy BS
Dd380815.eps Dd382303.eps
04669
DD380730.eps
Horizontal-busbar connections
Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04635 (1) (2) 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal Width y 80 mm 04636 (1) (2) busbar with Linergy LGY profile Width > 80 mm 04636 (2) + 04642 (1) (1) A part of the connection must be made. (2) Catalogue numbers 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
Designation
Cat. no.
B-32
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22320
Distribution
Main distribution
The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars rest on one of the fixed supports. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-26.
Busbar calculation
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10 1400 1250 1 bar, 60 x 10 3 3+2 3+4 3+6 1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
Dd381503.eps
Busbar selection
Designation
Cat. no.
Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Linergy BS rear vertical support for 5/10 mm bar Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
DD380732.eps
04653 04662
04653. Icw 40 kA rms / 1 s. and maintains the position of the bar. The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x 04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
DD381652.eps
04662.
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support and maintains the position of the bar. Designation Cat. no.
100 metallic spacer thickness 5 mm Linergy BS
Dd380815.eps
04669
DD380733.eps
Horizontal-busbar connections
Dd381504.eps
1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636 (1)(2) width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 (2) + 04642 (1) (1) A part of the connection must be made. (2) Catalogue number 04636 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
Designation
Cat. no.
400E22320
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-33
Distribution
Main distribution
Presentation
Decisions concerning the Form of separation and the degree of protection are the subject of an agreement between the manufacturer and the user.
In most installations, Prisma P cubicles do not require partitioning. In this case, the switchboard is a Form 1. Safety being one of its foremost goals, Schneider Electric offers options and features that go well beyond the recommendations of the standard. The protection of life and property is a standard feature due to: b front plates that require a tool to be removed b keylocks on doors, some of which provide access to live parts b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NSX circuit breakers and Compact INS and INV switch-disconnectors b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals on the incoming device so that operators are perfectly safe at all points in the switchboard when the incoming device is off (open). What is more, Prisma P offers different levels of partitioning to create separations inside the cubicles and thus create Form 2, 3 and 4 electrical switchboards. Electrical switchboards must meet the degree of protection IP2X to comply with standard IEC 61439-1 and 2.
DD384585.eps
Form 1 configuration
The protection of life and property is ensured by: b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NSX circuit breakers and on Compact INS and INV switch-disconnectors (see the pages on the functional units) b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals of the incoming device.
Device
Cover
04926.
B-34
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22900
Distribution
Main distribution
Front connection
Dd382019.eps
04861.
Dd382020.eps
Canalis connection
Device Form 1 cover 04861 + 04871 04852 + 04871 04851 + 04871 04852 + 04871
04861 + 04871.
Rear connection
Dd382021.eps
Cable connection
Device Form 1 cover 04863 04854 04853 04854
04863.
Dd382022.eps
Canalis connection
Device NW08/32 NT06/16 Form 1 cover 04863 + 04871 04854 + 04871 04853 + 04871 04854 + 04871
Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker
04863 + 04871.
400E22900
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-35
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 2 partitioning
Definition of Form 2
Separation of busbars from the functional units: b protection against contact with live parts upstream of the outgoing circuits b protection against penetration of foreign solid bodies. The two types of Form 2 separation as defined by IEC 60439-2
Dd381679.eps Dd381679.eps
Form 2a.
Form 2b.
b Form 2a Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars. The functional units are separated from the busbars, but not the terminals. b Form 2b Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars. b The functional units and the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Form 2 configuration
PD390420.eps
Form 2 partitioning is essential to ensure excellent protection for the installation and operators working in the switchboard. When added to standard protection features (terminal shields, prefabricated connections, etc.), it eliminates the risk of direct contacts with live parts. Prisma P offers Form 2b. Form 2b provides much better safety than Form 2a, notably during connection, because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
DD384526.eps
Form 2b partitioning.
B-36
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22900
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 2 partitioning
Dd383712.eps
Lateral partitioning
b vertical barrier made of insulating slats b can be installed on both sides of Linergy BS or Linergy LGY busbars b made up of: v four supports that clip to the framework v five extruded slats that clip to the supports v two metal plates at the top and bottom that can be cut out to pass a PE or PEN conductor, or one or two 30 x 60 mm trunking sections b the space between the slats is sufficient for prefabricated connections (one copper bar, 5 or 10 mm thick, or insulated flexible bars) or for cables up to 35 mm, while maintaining the degree of protection IP2X b compliance with standard IEC 695.2.1 concerning withstand to fire.
04922.
Dd383713.eps
This kit enables passage of the connection between a device > 1600 A (NW, INS) and lateral vertical busbars. It is made up of an insulated plate (six modules high = 300 mm) that can be cut as required, supplied with supports and the necessary hardware. It can be installed at any height in the switchboard. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
04922 04924
04924.
Barrier, W = 150 mm or W = 300 mm, from top to bottom of the cubicle. Can be installed in the front and rear of the busbar compartment. Protects against direct contact with the busbars. Cat. no. selection
Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars 04921 04920 Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars W = 300 mm(1) (1) A busbar support (04666) must be mounted for the bottom fixture of the 300 mm wide barrier.
Designation
Cat. no.
Front protection This barrier is not required in front when the cubicle is equipped with a plain or transparent door.
With door
Dd381588.eps Dd381589.eps
Dd383714.eps
Dd383715.eps
b For 800 mm cubicles : b the door is systematically supplied with a barrier. b the cover frame is supplied with a wicket door, W = 150 mm, on which devices can be mounted. A front barrier is indispensable. Rear protection A barrier is required at the rear of the busbar compartment in cubicles that are 600, 800 and 1000 mm deep.
DD382440.eps
04921
04920
400E22900
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-37
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 2 partitioning
Set of two barriers (front and rear), plus a slotted rear panel for efficient natural convection in the switchboard. The set can be used to partition horizontal busbars installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle. The space required for the busbars is not increased. Cat. no. selection Selection table In form 2 partitioning horiz. busbar
Linergy LGYE (P400) Top Bottom y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 Linergy LGYE (P600) Top Bottom y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 Linergy BS (P400) Top Bottom y 3200 A 3 4000 A 4 y 4000 A 3 04973 04963 04974 04964 04976 04966 04976 04966 04978 04968 04983 04963 04984 04964 04986 04966 04986 04966 04988 04968 04973 04963 04974 04964 04976 04966 04976 04966 04978 04968
Modularity L300
L400
L650
L650 + 150
L800
04973 + 04974 + 04976 + 04976 + 04976 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 04963 + 04964 + 04966 + 04966 + 04966 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919
DD384522.EPS
04983 + 04984 + 04986 + 04986 + 04986 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 04963 + 04964 + 04966 + 04966 + 04966 + 04915 04915 04915 04915 04915
04973 + 04974 + 04976 + 04976 + 04976 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 04983 04963 04984 04964 04986 04966 04986 04966 04988 04968
04983 + 04984 + 04986 + 04986 + 04986 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 Note: when the busbars are at the bottom of the cubicle, gland plates are mandatory, see page C-18.
DD384524.eps
To protect horizontal busbars installed at the bottom of the cubicle, the slotted horizontal panel can be replaced by a plain barrier. Designation Cat. no.
Plain barrier W = 300, W = 400 Plain barrier W = 650, W = 800 04915 04919
B-38
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22900
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 2 partitioning
We recommend running all auxiliary wires in trunking or straps. In Prisma P system P cubicles, the wires can be run in any combination of three directions (vertical, horizontal widthwise and horizontal depthwise) to ensure optimum and rational wiring layouts.
With Prisma P, the top and bottom partitioning plates of the lateral vertical busbars are equipped with knock-outs designed for the passage of two 30 x 60 mm trunking sections. These plates are reversible front and back to adapt to auxiliary wires running in the front or rear of the cubicles.
DD384586.EPS
400E22900
DD384099.eps
DD385322.eps
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-39
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 3 partitioning
Definition of Form 3
Separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units from one another. Separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units, but not from each other. b protection against contact with live parts b reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical arcs, etc.). The two types of Form 3 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1.
Dd381680.eps Dd381681.eps
Form 3a.
Form 3b.
Form 3a Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars. The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars, but not the terminals. b Form 3b Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars. The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars. The terminals are separated from the busbars, but not from each other.
Form 3 configuration
DD384527.eps
Form 2 switchboard with: b separation of the functional units from one another b separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units.
Prisma P offers Form 3b because it provides much better safety than Form 3a, because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Form 3b partitioning.
B-40
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22910
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 3 partitioning
Form 3 configuration
Dd383719.eps
Front connection
Presentation A horizontal metal partition can be used to physically separate functional units from one another. It is fixed at the rear by a support (two uprights) secured to the framework (400 mm deep) or to the intermediate uprights (600 mm deep frameworks). A set of brackets can be used to install partial Form 3 partitioning in the cubicle.It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard. Cat. no. selection Designation
Horizontal metal partition, W = 650 m Rear support for partitions, W = 650 mm 6 universal angle brackets
DD383107.eps
Cat. no.
04901 04943 03583
04901 + 04943
Dd383081.eps
04901 + 03583
Rear connection
Presentation For rear connection, in addition to the horizontal partitions, vertical partitions are required at the rear of each functional unit. There are two heights: b 3 to 4 modules b 5 to 6 modules. Cat. no. selection Designation
Vertical partitions (two cat. no. per functional unit) 3 to 4 modules 5 to 6 modules
Dd383601.eps
Cat. no.
04955 04956
400E22910
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-41
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 4 partitioning
Definition of Form 4
b separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units from one another, including the terminals for external conductors which are an integral part of the functional unit b protection against contacts with live parts and reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical arcs, etc.). The two types of Form 4 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1 and 2
Dd382369.eps Dd382370.eps
Form 4a.
Form 4b.
b Form 4a Terminals for external conductors in the same compartment as the associated b functional unit. b Form 4b Terminals for external conductors not in the same compartment as the associated functional unit, but in individual, separate, enclosed protected spaces or compartments.
Form 4 configuration
Form 3 switchboard with covers over the terminals for external conductors.
b Prisma P offers both Form 4a and Form 4b. In addition to partitioning of the main busbars (Form 2) and installation of the horizontal partitions between functional units (Form 3), the cubicle must be equipped with: b Form 4 gland plates to achieve Form 4a b Form 4 covers for connection transfer assemblies to achieve Form 4b.
DD384525.eps
B-42
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22920
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 4 partitioning
Dd382012.eps
Dd383084.eps
400E22920
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-43
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device
Front connection
Dd383603.eps
Cat. no.
04946 04951 04952
Dd383604.eps
Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules (W = 150 mm) 4 to 6 modules (W = 200 mm)
Dd382036.eps
04953.
Dd382438.eps
04954.
B-44
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22920
Distribution
Main distribution
Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device
Rear connection
Dd383605.eps
Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules 4 to 6 modules 04951 04952
D C B A
D C B A
Dd383606.eps
Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules 4 to 6 modules
Dd382039.eps
04953 04954
04954.
Dd383090.eps
04953.
400E22920
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-45
Distribution
Main distribution
Other partitions
Inter-cubicle partition
DD383720.eps
Metal partition, used to separate two adjacent cubicles. It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high. The top and bottom ends have knock-outs for busbars, PE/PEN conductors or auxiliary wiring. Supplied with the necessary supports and hardware, the partition is mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the functional mounting plates. Cat. no. selection Designation
Inter-cubicle partition Depth 400 mm Depth 600 mm
Cat. no.
04911 04911 + 04931
04911.
Dd383722.eps
04911 + 04931.
B-46
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
400E22930
Distribution
Main distribution
Other partitions
Inter-cubicle partition
DD383721.eps
Metal partition used to separate two adjacent cubicles (for example, when the power factor correction cubicle is combined with a main low-voltage switchboard). It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high. The top and bottom have knock-outs for horizontal busbars. Supplied with the necessary supports and mounting hardware, the partition is mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the power factor correction modules. Cat. no. selection Designation
Inter-cubicle partition Depth 400 mm Depth 600 mm
Cat. no.
04911 04931 + 04911
400E22930
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
B-47
Prisma P
For incoming devices up to 630 A
Linergy DX 1P 160 A Linergy DP 3P/4P 250 A
- Reliable spring-terminal connections for outgoing circuits, requiring no maintenance - Horizontal or vertical installation in minimum space
B-58
B-59
B-48
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E00030
distribution blocks
For rows of devices
100/250 A Linergy FC
- Tested solution for all needs up to 800 A - High-quality connections requiring no maintenance - Easy switchboard upgrades
B-62
B-55
63/200 A Linergy FM
- Reliable spring-terminal connections requiring no maintenance - Fast installation - Easy upgrades through replacement or addition of devices - Easy balancing of phases
B-60
Linergy FH 80 to 125 A
- Fast and direct connections, adaptable to all needs - Fast, economical connections
B-41
Linergy TB 63/160 A
- Innovative solution
B-72
400E00030
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-49
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Linergy BW busbars are compact and fully insulated (IPxxB). They are supplied ready for installation in the switchboard. There are three and four-pole versions with ratings from 125 to 630 A. Available in four lengths, they can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating.
Dd382577.eps
Presentation
Composition Linergy BW busbars are made up of ETP H12 channelled copper bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm. They are mounted on insulated bases and can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating. The ends of the busbars are plugged. Clip-on covers protect against direct contact from the front. The covers can be easily cut for the connections to the devices. Installation The busbars are supplied with supports that screw to the functional uprights of enclosures or to an adapter in a cubicle. They can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating. Electrical characteristics
Permissible current of the busbars (A) 125 160 250 400 630 Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms / 1 s) 8.5 10 13 20 25 Rated peak withstand current Ipk (k) 20 30 30 52.5 52.5
v rated insulation voltage: v Linergy BW 125 A busbars: Ui = 500 V v Linergy BW 160/400 A busbars: Ui = 750 V v Linergy BW 630 A busbars: Ui = 1000 V b impulse withstand voltage: v Linergy BW 125/630 A busbars: Uimp = 8 kV.
Dd382578.eps
Available in two lengths (450 and 750 mm) in three and four-pole versions. The busbars can be cut to length every 150 mm. They are supplied with clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut as needed. For Linergy BW busbars installation, order two adapters 03595 x 2 (4 lateral cross-members + 2 longitudinal cross-members). Cat. no. selection Linergy BW busbars 125 A
Three-pole Four-pole W = 450 mm W = 750 mm W = 450 mm W = 750 mm
Cat. no.
04103 04107 04104 04108 04145
Four 125 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals) A 35 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end. 95 mm tunnel terminals for Compact INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3) cat. no. 28948 (set of 4)
Busbar connection
B-50
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E22010
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Available in two lengths (1000 and 1400 mm) in three and four-pole versions. The busbars can be cut to length every 200 mm. Prefabricated connections are available for the devices.
Three-pole Four-pole
Linergy BW busbars
160 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
Universal power supply block (without connection) Connection for universal power supply block
NSX250 NSX400 NSX630 100/250 A 400/630 A Vertical NSX100/250 Vertical NSX100/250 in duct Vertical NSX400/630 in duct
Cat. no.
Dd383646.eps
NSX400 power supply block (04070) between incoming device and busbars. NSX250 power supply block (04060) between busbars and Compact NS250.
Dd383644.eps
Dd383645.eps
250 A universal power supply block (04061) + 250 A connection (04062) between incoming device and busbars.
Cat. no.
04021
35 mm additional blocks
Cat. no.
04155 04156
Additional block 2x35 3P for Linergy DP 250 Additional block 2x35 4P for Linergy DP 250 A 35 mm 4P additional blocks (04156).
Busbar connection
4 160 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NSA160) A 45 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end.
Cat. no.
04146
Cable lugs
Bare tubular elbow cable lugs: see page D-47.
Adaptation
Cat. no.
03595
Note: the adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030. For Linergy BW busbars installation, order two adapters 03595 x 2 (4 lateral cross-members + 2 longitudinal cross-members).
400E22010
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
B-51
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Accessories
Dd382580.eps
Each block can be used to connect: b one 6 mm and one 10 mm cable (04151) b one 16 mm cables (04152). Equipped with spring terminals. Designation
12 terminals for cable 6/10 and 1x10 for Linergy BW insulated busbar 12 terminals for cable 1x16 for Linergy BW insulated busbar
Cat. no.
04151 04152
Connection cover
Dd382581.eps
Clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut as needed. They maintain IPxxB with 90 angle lugs and/or cable sizes from 10 to 25 mm. Designation Cat. no.
8 IPXXB connection covers/ lug with cable 10-25 for Linergy BW insulated busbar 04150
Cat. no.
04158
B-52
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E22010
Distribution
Secondary distribution
The rear Linergy BS busbars are mounted directly on the uprights of the framework. There are three and four-pole versions with ratings from 160 to 400 A. Available in two lengths, 1000 and 1400 mm, they can be cut as needed. The connection with a Compact incoming device occupies two vertical modules (50 mm each).
Dd382627.eps
Presentation
Composition Linergy BS bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm for connection along the entire length of the busbars. The insulating supports can receive a fifth bar, 15 x 5 mm or 20 x 5 mm, to create an earth bar. Installation The busbars are mounted directly on the functional uprights of enclosures or on an adapter (03595) in a cubicle. Connection b 16 mm to 50 mm flexible cables, with crimped lugs b insulated flexible bars (see Insulated flexible bars, page B-64). Electrical characteristics b rated peak withstand current Ipk (k) v 30 k for 160 A busbars v 40 k for 250 A busbars v 55 k for 400 A busbars b rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V
Busbar calculation
Busbar size and distance between supports The table below indicates: b the size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the distance between supports, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). Rating Size of bars Distance between support centres (1) (A) (mm) (mm)
20 25 160 15 x 5 250 20 x 5 400 32 x 5 450 300 225 (1) Linergy FM 200 A distribution blocks equipped with connections (04029) can be used as intermediate supports (200 mm max. distance between centres) in addition to the top and bottom supports. Icw (kA rms / 1 s) 10 13 15
400E22020
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-53
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Busbar selection
Dd382628.eps
4 threaded bars L1000 for Linergy BS busbar 4 threaded bars L1400 for Linergy BS busbar
Copper bars
Rating (A)
160 250 400 160 250 400
Cat. no.
04161 04162 04163 04171 04172 04173
Busbar supports
04191
Copper bars.
Busbar supports.
Accessories
Dd382629.eps
Protects against direct contact with the busbar connections. Supplied with mounting hardware. Designation
Barrier H100 mm for Linergy BS 400 A rear busbar
04198
Cat. no.
04198.
Dd382630.eps
125 A connection
Four 125 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals) A 35 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end. 95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3) cat. no. 28948 (set of 4). 04145.
For direct supply to Linergy FH comb busbars from the rear Linergy BS busbars in the switchboard. Designation Cat. no.
04145
160 A connection
Designation
For direct supply from the rear Linergy BS busbars in the switchboard.
4 160 A connections A 45 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end.
Dd382631.eps
Cat. no.
04146
200 A connection
For supply of a 200 A Linergy FM distribution block from the rear busbars in the switchboard. Designation Cat. no.
4 connections Linergy BS rear busbar /linergy FM distribution block 4P 200 A 04029
Designation
04190
Cat. no.
Designation
04194 04195
Cat. no.
B-54
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22020
Distribution
Secondary distribution
General
Dd381399.eps
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, to spring terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor. It does not depend on the operator. Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations. Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring terminal. Degree of protection: IPxxB. Advantages b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed over time) b very fast connection b easy phase balancing b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified. The four-pole distribution block is made up of: b a fully insulated, one-piece distribution block complying with the degree of protection IPxxB (protection against direct contacts) b a modular cover. The design of the front (45 mm nose) blends perfectly into a row comprising modular devices. Designation Cat. no.
Linergy DX 63 A (top connection) Linergy DX 63 A (bottom connection) 125 A Linergy DX distribution block 160 A Linergy DX distribution block + connection 04040 04041 04045 04046
Cable connection.
DD381660.eps
b Electrical characteristics b rated insulation level: Ui = 750 V b rated operational current Ie (40C): v 125 A for the 125 A Linergy DX v 160 A for the 160 A Linergy DX with its prefabricated connection for INS160 or NSA160 b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been tested. b complies with the low-voltage device standard IEC 60947.7.1 and/or IEC 60439.1 b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply b tunnel terminal on 125 A Linergy DX 125 for 6 to 35v flexible cables (10 to 35v rigid cables) b the 160 A Linergy DX is supplied with a prefabricated flexible connection. It is designed for an INS100/160 or NSA160 switch-disconnector, installed on the left or right. Distribution (125 and 160 A Linergy DX) b spring terminals: v 2 outgoers from 1 to 10v, flexible or rigid v 3 outgoers from 1 to 6v, flexible or rigid v 7 outgoers from 1 to 4v, flexible or rigid b tunnel terminals: v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16v, flexible (4 to 25v rigid) Supply b an identification label b adhesive labels for phase identification b a prefabricated flexible connection for the INS160 or NSA160 (160 A Linergy DX only).
400E22015
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
B-55
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Installation b clipped onto a modular rail b width occupied is 12 modules (9 mm each) b screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Distances between centres = 100 x 75 mm. Dimensions
Dd381608.eps Dd381609.eps
125 A connection
PD390658R.eps
Set of four flexible connections, 35v, L = 210 mm. To supply a 125 A Linergy DX from a NG125 or a INS125. Designation
4 NG-INS125 connections for Linergy DX
Dd380932.eps
Cat. no.
04047
B-56
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E22015
Distribution
Secondary distribution
35 mm additional blocks
DD381403.eps
These blocks with screw terminals can be mounted on the 250 A Linergy DP for connection of two 35 mm cables per phase. Designation Cat. no.
35 mm 3P additional blocks (3 blocks) 35 mm 4P additional blocks (4 blocks) 04155 04156
The 160 A Linergy DX is made up of individual elements that can be used alone or with others to make two-pole, three-pole or four-pole distribution blocks. Mounting is very fast. It clips onto a modular rail and is supplied by cables via a tunnel terminal. The connection spring terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and bending of the flexible and rigid cables. It is supplied with a cover that also guides the cables. Cat. no. selection
Designation
Three 160 A Linergy DX distribution blocks in the vertical position on a modular rail, supplied by an NG125. Linergy DX distribution block, 1P, 160 A
Cat. no.
04031
Electrical characteristics b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations were tested. The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices. Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered. b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply Direct to a tunnel terminal, for cables up to 70 mm. Distribution Via cables, up to six 16 mm cables. Installation The blocks clip onto a modular rail. Dimensions
Dd384321.eps
Dd382981.eps
70
95
36
400E22090
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
B-57
Distribution
Secondary distribution
General
Dd381399.eps
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1 mm ). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations. Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring terminal. Degree of protection: IPxxB. Advantages of spring terminals b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy. b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified.
PD390549R.eps
Applications The Linergy DP distribution block is designed for installation directly downstream of Compact circuit breakers and Compact switch-disconnectors devices up to 250 A. It can be rapidly mounted in the horizontal position. Electrical connections are made directly to the device terminals. It has the same width as the devices and does not take up any additional space in the switchboard. The connection terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and not exceed the bending radius of the flexible and rigid cables. Cat. no. selection Designation
Linergy DP distribution block, 3P, 250 A Linergy DP distribution block, 4P, 250 A
Cat. no.
04033 04034
Electrical characteristics The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices. Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered. b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been tested. b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply Directly to the terminals of the Compact NSX and Compact INS devices up to 250 A. Distribution Via cables, up to six 10 mm cables and three 16 mm cables per phase.
Vertically mounted Linergy DP on a depth-adjustable modular rail (03402) in a cubicle.
DD381402.eps
Installation Directly on the mounting plates of horizontally mounted Compact NSX100/250 and Compact INS250 devices in the enclosures. It can also be mounted downstream of vertically mounted Compact NSX100/250 and Compact INS250 devices in the enclosures. In this case, the Linergy DP is mounted on a depth-adjustable modular rail (03402). Dimensions
Linergy DP, 3P Linergy DP, 4P
DD384581.eps
H (mm)
105 140 D
W (mm)
138 138
D (mm)
63 63
B-58
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
400E22090
Distribution
Secondary distribution
The Linergy BS distribution block can be installed horizontally in the device zone or vertically in the 300 mm wide duct of wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures. It is not compatible with Pack enclosures. The distribution block is made up of: b two staggered supports made of an insulating material b four slanted copper bars with holes every 25 mm v 13 threaded M6 holes for outgoers v four 12.2 mm diameter holes to supply the distribution block. It is supplied with: b M6 hardware b one IPxxB insulating barrier for the front. Cat. no. selection Linergy BS multi-stage distri. block
160 A Distribloc (40 C) 250 A Distribloc (40 C) 400 A Distribloc (40 C) 630 A Distribloc (40 C)
Cat. no.
04052 04053 04054 04055
Electrical characteristics b Rated operational current Ie (40 C): v 160 A for distribution block 04052 v 250 A for distribution block 04053 v 400 A for distribution block 04054 v 630 A for distribution block 04055 b Rated insulation level Ui = 750 V b Rated short-time withstand current Icw: v 10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A block v 13 kA rms / 1 s for 250 A block v 20 kA rms / 1 s for 400 A block v 25 kA rms / 1 s for 630 A block b Rated peak withstand current Ipk: v 30 k for 160 A block v 30 k for 250 A block v 40 k for 400 A block v 40 k for 630 A block b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply b 16 mm2 to 50 mm2 cables with crimped lugs b 20 x 2 mm flexible bars for NSX100/160 b 20 x 3 mm flexible bars for NSX250 b 32 x 5 mm flexible bars for NSX400 b 32 x 8 mm flexible bars for NSX630. Distribution 13 outgoers per phase, max. 50 mm2. Installation b Screwed to plain or slotted backplate b Screwed onto the adapter 03595.
Dd383648.eps Dd383647.eps
Dd381341.eps
Dimensions
DD381344.eps
400E22050
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-59
Distribution
Secondary distribution
General
Dd381399.eps
For connections, the distribution block uses a proven technique, i.e. spring terminals. Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring terminals. Contact pressure does not depend on the operator. It automatically adapts to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1mm). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations. Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring terminal Degree of protection: IPxxB. Advantages bb A reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed over time) bb The fast connections make phase balancing very easy. bb Rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified. Application Distribution over half or full rows of modular devices. It is generally supplied by a device at the head of a group of outgoers (NG125, INS, C60 or IC60, etc.). Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
80 A Linergy FM distribution block 80 A Linergy FM distribution block, 4P 63 A Linergy FM distribution block, 4P, 1/2 row 04000 04004 04008
Cable connection.
PB104505.eps
DD384088.EPS
Electrical characteristics b Rated insulation level Ui = 500 V. b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 6 kV. b Short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been tested. b 63/80 A Linergy FM distribution blocks: vv 4 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 32 A vv 6 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 40 A vv two 6 mm cables: Imax = 63 A. Supply Via tunnel terminals up to 25 mm, generally from a device supplying a group of outgoers. The tunnel terminals are positioned to facilitate cable entry and screw tightening. They are designed for cables arriving from the top or bottom. Distribution bb For the full-row Linergy FM, 4P (04004), each phase offers: vv 2 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 7 connection points for 4 mm max. cable bb The neutral offers: vv 4 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 13 connection points for 4mm max. cable bb For the half-row Linergy FM, 4P (04008), each phase offers: vv 2 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 2 connection points for 4 mm max. cable bb The neutral offers: vv 4 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 4 connection points for 4 mm max. cable Each connection point can receive a single cable, either flexible or rigid. Installation bb Clipped onto the rear of modular rail. bb Screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
Dd381665.eps Dd381664.eps
04000.
DD381661.eps
04008.
04004.
Supplied with 100 mm long bared copper connections b For full-row Linergy FM (04004): v 2 sets of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections b For half-row Linergy FM (04008): v 1 set of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections. B-60 Version : 2.0 16/04/2013 400E22110
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Application Distribution over full rows of modular devices. The distribution block is generally supplied by busbars in enclosures and cubicles. Cat. no. selection Designation
200 A Linergy FM, 2P 200 A Linergy FM, 3P 200 A Linergy FM, 4P 160 A Linergy FM, 4P, 1/2 row
Cat. no.
04012 04013 04014 04018
DD381672.eps
Electrical characteristics b Rated insulation level Ui = 750 V. b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. b Short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been. b 160/200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks: v 10 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 50 A v two 10 mm cables: Imax = 63 A. Supply b Direct to terminals: v 50 mm cables with crimped lugs v 20 x 3 mm flexible bars b From Linergy BW insulated busbars in a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (04021). b From lateral, channelled busbars in a cubicle (connection must be made). b From busbars in the duct of a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (04024). b From busbars in the rear of a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (04029). Busbar connection Designation Cat. no.
04021 04024 04029 Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and Powerclip insulated busbars (enclosure) Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and busbars in a duct (enclosure) Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and rear busbars (enclosure)
04012.
DD381670.eps
04013.
DD381671.eps
Distribution bb 200 A Linergy FM, 2P (04012): vv 12 connection points for phase and neutral bb 200 A Linergy FM, 3P and 4P (04013 and 04014): vv 12 connection points for each phase vv 18 connection points for the neutral bb 160 A Linergy FM, 4P, 1/2 row (04018): vv 6 connection points for each phase vv 9 connection points for the neutral Each connection point can receive a single 10 mm cable, either flexible or rigid. Installation bb Clipped onto the rear of modular rail bb Screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Supplied with: bb 100 mm long, bared 10 mm copper connections vv 200 A Linergy FM, 2P, 3P and 4P (04012, 04013 et 04014): 2 sets of 12 connections vv 160 A Linergy FM, 1/2 row (04018): 1 set of 12 connections bb protection covers for the supply terminals (IPxxB) bb the hardware required for the supply terminals.
Dd383655.eps Dd383472.eps
04014.
DD381673.eps
04018.
400E22110
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
B-61
Distribution
Secondary distribution
PD390570R.eps
PD390569R.eps
Presentation Linergy FC is a horizontal distribution block. It connects directly to the mounting plate and can supply: three four-pole and four three-pole Compact NSX circuit breakers, whatever the ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), the operating systems (toggle, rotary handle, motor mechanism), whether fixed or plug-in, front or rear connection (the circuit breakers must be equipped with long terminal shields downstream) three three-pole or four-pole Compact INS switch-disconnectors, whatever the ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), whether front or rear connection. The design and small size blend perfectly with the devices. It can be supplied by Linergy BS or Linergy LGYbusbars positioned to the left or right. A dependable switchboard Fully insulated, Polypact contributes to the safety of life and property. The prefabricated connections supplied separately are secured using torque nuts to ensure the correct tightness over time, without maintenance. Numerous and well distributed vents ensure natural convection and optimum cooling of the conductors. An upgradeable switchboard The circuit breakers can be easily connected from the front. It is simple to interchange a device or to add a device in a reserve slot. Functional features There are markings (N, L1, L2, L3) on the front and the sides for the phases. The running of auxiliary cables between the devices and the corresponding terminal blocks is also taken into account. Spacious trunking is built into the blocks for the auxiliary wiring. Cat. no. selection Fixed Compact NSX100/250 with toggle and Compact INS250
Connection to Linergy LGY busbars Linergy FC with prefabricated connections Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 3P toggle/fixed + connection Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 4P toggle/fixed + connection
Dd383592.eps
Connection to Linergy BS or Linergy LGY busbars Cat. no. Linergy FC with prefabricated connections Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 3P fixed/plug-in + 04405 connection Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 4P fixed/plug-in + 04406 connection Linergy FC without connection (3) Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 3P fixed w/o connection 04407 Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 4P fixed w/o connection 04408 (1) For plug-in Compact NSX circuit breakers, order the adapter LV429306 (3P) or LV429307 (4P) with the base. (2) The connection of a Linergy FC distribution block using prefabricated connections or insulated flexible bars is not compatible with Form 2 partitioning (04922). In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit (04924): see page B-37. (3) Make the connection with flexible bars, 32 x 8 mm (04753): see page B-64.
Electrical characteristics b In (A): distribution-block derating follows the normal derating curves of Compact NSX and Compact INS devices. b Rated insulation level: 750 V b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV b Short-circuit withstand current compatible with the breaking capacity of the Compact NS circuit breakers connected to the distribution block. Remark For most installations, the temperature around the switchboard is 40 C, corresponding to an average temperature of 60 C inside the switchboard. Under certain conditions, the temperature inside the switchboard may be different, for example if the room temperature is higher than 40 C or if the cubicle is equipped with a fan.
B-62
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22500
Distribution
Secondary distribution
In (A) as a function of the temperature inside the switchboard Temperature (C) 40 45 50 55 Inc (A) Linergy FC 3P 800 800 775 750 Linergy FC 4P 675 675 655 635
60 725 615
65 700 595
70 675 570
b To obtain the maximum permissible current for the Linergy FC distribution block, apply the rated diversity factor RDF: b Linergy FC 3P: RDF = 0.8 b Linergy FC 4P: RDF = 0.9. Supplied with: bb self-adhesive labels to mark the phases for the connections to the busbars.
DD381247.eps Dd381249.eps
04404.
Dd381251.eps
04408.
Dd381250.eps
Supply of three NSX100/250 four-pole devices equipped with long terminal shields downstream.
Dd383593.eps
Dd381253.eps
Phase marking on the side of the distribution block. Identification labels on the flexible connections.
Tooth-caps
Dd383594.eps
Designation
Linergy FC tooth-caps
Cat. no.
04809
The caps block off the reserve terminals on a Linergy FC three-pole or four-pole distribution block. Made of an insulating material, they simply clip on from the front.
Dd381255.eps
400E22500
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-63
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Presentation
DD381659.eps
The insulated flexible bars are tested in a type-tested switchboard environment. Their design takes into account the switchboard architecture where they are often in close proximity to a protection device (circuit breaker or fuse) with significant heat losses. In-depth knowledge of switchboard architecture and the connected devices led to the establishment of a selection table based on the type of device. Flexible bars are 1800 mm long and made of copper with an insulating sheath. Rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V. The sizes for the flexible bars indicated below take into account the heat losses of Schneider devices in a Prisma P switchboard.
The flexible bars are determined taking into account the connected device, whatever the internal temperature of the switchboard. The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices. Device Size (mm) Cat. no.
NSX100 20 x 2 04742 04743 NSX160/250 20 x 3 (1) NSX400 32 x 5 04751 NSX630 32 x 8 04753 INS125/160 20 x 2 04742 INS250 20 x 3 04743 INS400 32 x 5 04751 INS630 32 x 6 04752 200 A Linergy FM 20 x 3 04743 32 x 8 04753 Linergy FC, 3P (2) 32 x 8 04753 Linergy FC, 4P (2) Fupact 250 24 x 5 04746 Fupact 400 32 x 5 04751 Fupact 630 32 x 8 04753 Easypact CVS100 20 x 2 04742 04743 Easypact CVS160/250 20 x 3 (1) Easypact CVS400 32 x 5 04751 Easypact CVS630 32 x 8 04753 (1) To connect a Compact NSX250, an Easypact CVS250 to Linergy FC busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar (04746). (2)The connection of a Linergy FC distribution block using insulated flexible bars is not compatible with Form 2 partitioning (04922). In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit 04924 (see page B-37). Note: the references 87646 (3P) and 87647 (4P) can be used up to 250 A, when binding of insulated flexible bars, to withstand Isc.
b Connection between busbars Flexible bars are designed for connections between busbars taking into account the following characteristics: bb a maximum temperature of 60 C inside the switchboard. This corresponds to the average temperature inside a switchboard for an ambient temperature of 35 C bb the maximum withstand temperature for the insulating material is 125 C. Ie max. (A) Size (mm) Cat. no.
200 250 400 520 580 660
DD382008.eps
20 x 2 20 x 3 24 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 6 32 x 8
B-64
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22140
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports
Cable-tie supports
DD381555.eps
Cable-tie supports are used to correctly position the cables in the connection compartment. They are sold in sets of four and supplied with the necessary hardware for connection to the framework. Longitudinal cable-tie supports Width of cable compartment
W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm
DD381556.eps
b Lateral cable-tie supports There are two sizes: b D = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep b D = 200 mm, this support is added to the 400 mm support for frameworks that are 650 mm deep. It can also be installed alone. Depth of cable compartment Set of four cable-tie supports
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
DD381557.eps
08794.
Dd381638.eps
08796.
400E23220
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
B-65
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports
b C-shaped longitudinal and lateral cable-tie supports 1600 mm long support that can be cut to length as needed. Can be secured to: bb universal angle bracket 03581 (for the longitudinal support) bb universal angle bracket 03582 (for the lateral support) bb modular rail 03593 (for depth adjustment). Designation
Cable-tie support W = 1600 mm
Cat. no.
08783
Supplied with hardware for mounting on universal angle brackets and modular rails. Cables can be attached by ties or clamps.
Universal cross-members
DD381316.eps
b Longitudinal cross-members Set of two longitudinal cross-members, W = 650 mm. They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 650 + 150 mm). They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite). They are used to position and support the cables of an incoming device. Lateral cross-members They are connected directly to the uprights of the framework. They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of longitudinal cross-members. There are two lengths: b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm crossmembers for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed separately. Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lateral crossmembers Set of two longitudinal cross-members W = 400 mm W = 200 mm W = 650 mm 03584 03586 03587
B-66
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E23220
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Busbar accessories
Mounting hardware
General
The 8.8 class (64 N/mm) hardware ensures precise tightening torques and a reliable contact over time. The hardware is designed to resist creep and ageing of the electrical contact. It is protected against corrosion by a Zn8c treatment.
M8 bolts
DD380737.eps
Composition of sets: b set of 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 40 contact washers. Cat. no. selection Designation
20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 20/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 25/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 30/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 35/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 40/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 45/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 50/Linergy BS
Cat. no.
04782 04783 04784 04785 04786 04787 04788
Flat washers
DD380738.eps
Presentation These washers, sold separately, are required for connection between flexible bars and Linergy BS or Linergy LGY busbars. They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper. Composition of sets: b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts. Cat. no. selection Designation
20 M8/diameter 20 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 24 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 28 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY
Cat. no.
04772 04773 04774
400E22400
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-67
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Busbar accessories
Torque nuts
DD380735.eps
Can be used to obtain the correct tightening torque (28 Nm) recommended by then manufacturer, without using a torque wrench. Torque nuts may be used for all electrical connections. Designation Cat. no.
20 M8 torque nuts 04759
Voltage tap-offs
DD380736.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
20 M10 voltage tap-offs for two 6.35 mm tab connectors 04229 Note: For small lugs (on low-current cables or measurement tap-offs), insert a conducting washer (cat. no. 04775) between the busbar and the lug.
Metal chock, 5 mm thick. Chocks are used to maintain the position of rear, vertical, flat busbars. Designation
100 metallic spacer thickness 5 mm Linergy BS
DD380734.eps
Cat. no.
04669
Mounting hardware
DD383120.eps
Special mounting hardware for the connection of flat lateral busbars to horizontal busbars. Assembly of 10 mm thick bars for configurations with 2 bars/phase (1850 A to 3200 A). Designation Cat. no.
20 screws for joint 2 x 10 mm Linergy BS horizontal/vertical busbar 04645
B-68
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22400
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Linergy TR
Introduction
PB502409.eps
New!
PB502406.eps
PB502408.eps
400E22120
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-69
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Linergy TR
Terminal blocks
New!
Connection technology
Type of terminal block Cross section area Color Screw tech Spring tech Push-in tech Miniature screw for 15 mm DIN rail NSYTR V22M NSYTR V22MBL NSYTR V42M NSYTR V42MBL NSYTR V22MPE NSYTR V42MPE Miniature spring Miniature spring for 15 mm for direct mount DIN rail NSYTR R22M NSYTR R22MBL NSYTR R24M NSYTR R24MBL NSYTR R22MPE NSYTR R22MF NSYTR R22MFBL NSYTR R22MFF* NSYTR R24M NSYTR R24MBL -
Passthrough 2,5 mm (2 pts) Grey Blue Orange 2,5 mm (3 pts) Grey Blue Orange 2,5 mm Grey (4 pts, 1 level) Blue 2,5 mm Grey (4 pts, 2 levels) Blue 4 mm (2 pts) Grey Blue Orange Grey Blue Orange Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Grey Orange Grey Orange Grey
NSYTR V22 NSYTR V22BL NSYTR V22AR NSYTR V24D NSYTR V24DBL NSYTR V42 NSYTR V42BL NSYTR V42AR NSYTR V43 NSYTR V43BL NSYTR V43AR NSYTR V44 NSYTR V44BL NSYTR V44D NSYTR V44DBL NSYTR V62 NSYTR V62BL NSYTR V102 NSYTR V102BL NSYTR V162 NSYTR V162BL NSYTRV1502BB NSYTR V22PE NSYTR V42PE NSYTR V43PE NSYTR V44PE NSYTR V62PE NSYTR V102PE NSYTR V162PE NSYTR V42ST (1) NSYTR V42STAR (1) NSYTRV42SCD (1)
NSYTR R22 NSYTR R22BL NSYTR R22AR NSYTR R23 NSYTR R23BL NSYTR R23AR NSYTR R24 NSYTR R24BL NSYTR R24D NSYTR R24DBL NSYTR R42 NSYTR R42BL NSYTR R42AR NSYTR R43 NSYTR R43BL NSYTR R44 NSYTR R44BL NSYTR R44D NSYTR R44DBL NSYTR R62 NSYTR R62BL NSYTR R102 NSYTR R102BL NSYTR R162 NSYTR R162BL NSYTR R22PE NSYTR R23PE NSYTR R24PE NSYTR R42PE NSYTR R43PE NSYTR R44PE NSYTR R62PE NSYTR R102PE NSYTR R162PE NSYTR R22SC NSYTR R22SCAR NSYTR R23SC NSYTR R23SCAR NSYTRR24SCD NSYTR R22TB -
NSYTR P22 NSYTR P22BL NSYTR P22AR NSYTR P23 NSYTR P23BL NSYTR P23AR NSYTR P24 NSYTR P24BL NSYTR P24D NSYTR P24DBL NSYTR P42 NSYTR P42BL NSYTR P43 NSYTR P43BL NSYTR P44 NSYTR P44BL NSYTR P22PE NSYTR P23PE NSYTR P24PE NSYTR P42PE NSYTR P43PE NSYTR P44PE NSYTR P22SC NSYTR P23SC NSYTR P42TB -
4 mm (3 pts)
4 mm (4 pts, 1 level) 4 mm (4 pts, 2 levels) 6 mm (2 pts) 10 mm (2 pts) 16 mm (2 pts) 150 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (3 pts) 2,5 mm (4 pts) 4 mm (2 pts) 4 mm (3 pts) 4 mm (4 pts) 6 mm (2 pts) 10 mm (2 pts) 16 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (3 pts)
Earth protection
Knife Disconnect
Fuse Disconnect
2,5 mm (2 levels) 4 mm (2 pts) Black NSYTR V42SF5 5 x 20 mm fuse Black (12 V) NSYTR V42SF5LD
(2)
Basic 4 mm (2 pts) Disconnect (3) Measuring 6 mm (2 pts) Disconnect transducer 6 mm (2 pts) 6 mm (2 pts) * Grey terminal with flange.
Grey
NSYTRV 42TB
(1) 4 mm terminal, with 2 test points. (2) With light indicator. (3) Fuse or component carrier not supplied.
B-70
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22120
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Linergy TR
Terminal blocks
Connection technology
Miniature spring for direct mount NSYTR R22MP NSYTR R22MPBL NSYTR R24MP NSYTR R24MPBL End plate for screw TBs NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA CE24 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA C23 NSYTRA C24 NSYTRA CE24 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA C162 NSYTRAC952 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C23 NSYTRA C24 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C162 Included Included NSYTRA CE24 Included Included Included NSYTRA CT22 NSYTRA CT22 NSYTRA CT22 NSYTRA CT22 End plate for spring TBs NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR22BL NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR23BL NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR24BL NSYTRA CRE24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CR43 NSYTRA CR44 NSYTRA CRE44 NSYTRA CR62 NSYTRA CR102 NSYTRA CR162 NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CR43 NSYTRA CR44 NSYTRA CR62 NSYTRA CR102 NSYTRA CR162 NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR24 Included NSYTRA CR23 -
Accessories
End plate for push-in TBs NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR22BL NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR23BL NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR24BL NSYTRA CRE24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CP43 NSYTRA CP44 NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CP43 NSYTRA CP44 NSYTRA CPK22 NSYTRA CPK23 NSYTRA CR42 Plug-in bridge Marking strips 10 characters NSYTRA B510 NSYTRA B520 NSYTRA B530 NSYTRA B540 NSYTRA B550 NSYTRA B590 NSYTRA B5100 NSYTRA B51100 NSYTRA B610 NSYTRA B620 NSYTRA B630 NSYTRA B640 NSYTRA B650 NSYTRA B690 NSYTRA B6100 NSYTRA B61100 NSYTRA B810 NSYTRA B820 NSYTRA B1010 NSYTRA B1020 NSYTRA B1010 NSYTRA B1020 -
NSYTRA L22 NSYTRA L23 NSYTRA L24 NSYTRA L25 NSYTRA L210 NSYTRA L210BL NSYTRA L210GR NSYTRA L220 NSYTRA L42 NSYTRA L43 NSYTRA L44 NSYTRA L45 NSYTRA L410 NSYTRA L410BL NSYTRA L410GR NSYTRA L420 NSYTRA L62 NSYTRA L610 NSYTRA L102 NSYTRA L162 NSYTRA L1502
400E22120
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-71
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Terminal block components b These components are used to build and install a Linergy TB terminal block: b on the framework near the conductor entry point b on a DIN rail mounted on the enclosure framework b at the rear of the enclosure or the interface b on the functional uprights in Prisma switchboards. Permissible current: b 50 mm terminal block kit: 160 A max. at 40 C b 25 mm terminal block kit: 90 A max. at 40 C b 6 x 4 mm terminal block kit: 63 A max. at 40 C b 8-block junction kit: v 90 A with 1 junction v 160 A with 2 junctions mounted in parallel. b 2-block junction kit: 90.
DB107884.eps DB107885.eps
DB107883.eps
PB101638_68.eps
Terminal blocks 50 mm terminal block kit 25 mm terminal block kit PRA90047 4 x 6 mm terminal block kit Terminal block junction 8-block junction kit 2-block junction kit Terminal block support Terminal block support kit W = 8 blocks W = 2 blocks Batch of 1 Batch of 10 W = 2 blocks W = 1 block W = 1 block Batch of 2 Batch of 5 Batch of 10
PRA90045
DB107886.eps DB107887.eps
PRA90046
PRA90049
DB107888.eps
PRA90050
PB101639_32.eps
DB107891.eps
For converting terminal block kits PRA90045/PRA90046/PRA90047 into an incoming splitter block up to 125 A and 50 mm. Permissible current: b entry via PRA90046 (1 x 25 mm - 1 block): 80 A b entry via PRA90045 (1 x 50 mm - 2 blocks): 125 A Ui: 400 V and Uimp: 6 kV.
W = 1 block
Batch of 4
PRA90048
B-72
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22120
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Introduction
Dd383711.eps Dd381511.eps
In Prisma cubicles, terminal blocks are commonly installed in a lateral compartment, generally 300 or 400 mm wide. They may also be installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle.
400E22130
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-73
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Terminal blocks are grouped on modular rails that can be depth adjusted behind a plain front plate. Designation Cat. no.
Modular rail, depth adjustable (W = 432 mm) 03402
Terminal blocks can also be installed on a modular rail turned using universal angle brackets and mounted on lateral cross-members. Designation Cat. no.
2 modular rails, W = 1600 mm 2 universal angle brackets Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm 04226 03581 03584
DD380776.eps
The terminal block is generally installed in the cable compartment, W = 300 or 400 mm. The terminal blocks clip onto a modular rail. The rail is secured to cable-tie supports using universal angle brackets for precise positioning of the terminal blocks. Designation
2 modular rails, W = 1600 mm 2 universal angle brackets Cable-tie supports
Cat. no.
04226 03581 see page B-65
Terminal blocks can be directly installed on the mounting plates for horizontally mounted Compact NSX100/630 and vertically mounted Compact NS630b/1600 for connection of auxiliary wires.
B-74
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22130
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Connection
Linergy BS connector
Linergy BS connector
DD381594R.eps
Cat. no.
07051 (1) 07052 (1) 07053 (1)
E56852.eps
07051
E56851.eps
07052
400E22130
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
E56850.eps
07053
B-75
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Cable running
Cable straps
Designation
Cat. no.
04262
Designation
Cat. no.
04263
B-76
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22150
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Cable running
Cable straps
Designation
Cat. no.
04239
Designation
Cat. no.
04243
400E22150
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-77
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Cable running
Trunking
The 30 or 60 mm deep trunking sections can be installed directly on the modular-rail supports or on the mounting plates of vertically mounted Compact NSX circuit breakers.
Dd381625.eps
Dd380866.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
04255
Aligns the cover of a horizontal trunking section (H = 60 or 80 mm) with that of a vertical trunking section (H = 80 mm). Cat. no. Designation
10 adaptable support for horizontal trunking
Dd382924.eps
Dd382922.eps
04256
B-78
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22150
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Cable running
Trunking, accessories
Trunking
Dd381639.eps
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, W = 450 mm (with supports) Vertical trunking, 80 x 60 mm, W = 2000 mm (sold in sets of 18)
Designation
Cat. No.
04257 04267
Dd381640.eps
Cable trunking for doors, W = 2000 mm (sold in sets of 30) Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm.
Designation
Cat. No.
04233
Flexible trunking
DD380863.eps
Designation
Cat. No.
04235
Designation
Cat. No.
04228
Designation
Cat. No.
04234
400E22150
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-79
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Presentation The Linergy TB earth bar can be: b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with a 35 mm terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with a 35 mm terminal and clamps with captive screws. Earth bar with spring terminals Designation
12 x 3 mm direct earth bar with 1 terminal 35 L330 Linergy TB 4 earth block 12 x 4 quick connection Linergy TB 4 earth block 3 x 16 quick connection Linergy TB
Dd381560.eps
Cat. no.
04201 04214 04215
04201.
04214.
04215.
Dd381516.eps
Cat. no.
04200 04202
04200.
Installation The Linergy TB earth bar is mounted on two supports that clip onto the rear of a modular rail installed horizontally in the device compartment or vertically in the cable compartment. Designation Cat. no.
2 supports for earth bar on modular rail 04205
Dd381517.eps
Linergy TB earth bar mounted on rear of modular rail using supports (04205).
B-80
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
Dd381518.eps
400E22450
Distribution
Secondary distribution
A neutral bar is created by inserting insulating spacers behind an Linergy TB earth bar. Designation Cat. no.
2 insulated spacers for neutral bar Linergy TB 04210
400E22450
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-81
Distribution
Secondary distribution
Linergy PE conductor
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment. A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using three supports. Permissible current (A)
630 800
Support selection
Linergy connection hardware Composition of set: Set including 20 M8 bolts (W = 25 mm) + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers for connection to cable lugs or flexible bars.
Mounting of a vertical PE (Linergy LGY).
Designation
Cat. no.
04766
DD381182.eps
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment. A flat bar is secured to the framework using three supports. Selection (mm)
25 x 5 50 x 5
Support selection
Horizontal PE conductor
Dd381184.eps
A flat bar is mounted at the top or bottom of a switchboard (contrary to horizontal busbars) using supports. Selection Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40 > 40
Selection (mm)
25 x 5 50 x 5
Support selection
A copper connection plate can be used to connect: b a vertical PE bar to a horizontal PE bar b two horizontal PE bars. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
04672
B-82
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22350
Distribution
Secondary distribution
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment. A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using a mounting kit. Cat. no. selection Designation
Linergy bar Linergy TB PEN installation kit with LGY vertical profile 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile Linergy LGYE vertical connection 1600 A
Cat. no.
see page B-18 04656 04636 04602
Contents of Linergy PEN kit b 4 insulating supports b 1 neutral disconnecting device b 1 connection between a horizontal PEN and a vertical PEN y 1600 A.
400E22350
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
B-83
B-84
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E22350
Enclosures
Contents
C-25 C-25
Air-conditioning accessories
Dimensions C-30
Cubicles C-30
Additional information D-1
400E50030
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
C-1
Enclosures
Carefully designed in every detail, Prisma P cubicles are the solution for all common switchboard configurations up to 4000 A. A reduced number of catalogue numbers facilitates selection, while offering the essential functions such as: b multiple combination possibilities b an array of interchangeable cover panels and doors, IP30 or IP55, without adding gaskets b total accessibility to all connection points in the switchboard b wide cable compartments b high for large capacity (36 modules, each 50 mm high).The discreet design, with simple lines and oval shapes in the RAL 9001 colour, mean Prisma P cubicles blend in naturally on all commercial and industrial sites.They offer 36 modules, each 50 mm high, of useful space. They comply with standard EN 50298.
PD390422.eps
All cover panels and doors (IP30 or IP55) are secured using quarter-turn fasteners.Electrical continuity is achieved naturally, without having to add clips or earthing braids.
C-2
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23000
Enclosures
DD380642.eps
Frameworks can be combined side-by-side or back-to-back to create all switchboard configurationsup to 3200 A.
DD380641.eps
Front plates are installed on a frame that can pivot on the framework. The front can be: b a plain door (IP30/55) b a transparent door (IP30/55) b a cover frame (IP30).
400E23000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-3
Enclosures
PD390573R.eps
The framework is both light and rigid due to the closed sections used for the uprights. The compact design of the framework means there is 15 % more space available for devices. There are no sharp edges. Assembly is particularly fast with only 12 screws, all directly accessible. Uprights have wing holes every 25 mm. A measuring tape can be hooked to a slot marking the starting point for measurements on the heights required to mount devices. Marks every 50 mm and double marks every 100 mm make it easy to count modules.The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the cubicles.
PD390574R.eps
PD390575R.eps
The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the cubicles.
The front plates are equipped with clip-mount grips with a built-in quarter-turn fastening system for fast handling and installation.The lead-sealing function is directly integrated in the grip mechanism.
PD391307.eps
This frame provides direct and fast access to the devices. It is reversible and has two factory-mounted hinges. Only two screws are required to secure it to the framework.
By pivoting, the front plate support frame provides direct access to devices.
C-4
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23000
Enclosures
Both plain and transparent doors are reversible and designed for quick and easy left or right-hand mounting by a single person. The factory-mounted hinges are secured on quarter-turn studs. The one-piece handle clips firmly into place. All connection points are located on the front of the uprights and do not take up any useful space for devices. For 800 mm wide cubicles, the doors are supplied with a 150 mm wide barrier to block access to the busbars. A wide range of locks are available for the push and pull handle.
PD390874.eps
PD390649R.eps
Rear panels
The IP30 panels are made up of two identical and interchangeable half panels that are easy to handle. They are flat to occupy minimum of floor space. Vents ensure natural ventilation of the switchboard. The IP55 panels are reinforced (IK10) and have positioning studs to facilitate mounting.
Side panels
They are easy to handle given their ergonomic design and rounded edges. Mounting is guided at the base by hooking onto special studs. Similar to all the cover panels, the side panels are rapidly secured by quarter-turn fasteners.
PD390650R.eps
The roof
The roof panel is flat for passage under all doorways and includes four holes for the lifting rings. The lifting rings can be installed and removed without removing the roof.
400E23000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-5
Enclosures
W = 300/400
W = 650/800
W = 300/400
W = 650/800
Framework combinations
DD380578.eps
Side-by-side
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit. To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed between the combined cubicles.
Back-to-back
An optional kit for back-to-back combinations is available. It is used to mechanically connect the frameworks. It is supplied with a gasket to be installed between the cubicles (for IP55).
DD380579.eps
C-6
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23000
Enclosures
Front panels b for frameworks 650 and 800 mm wide. Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a cover frame (IP30) bb for frameworks 300 and 400 mm wide. A plain door is used (IP30 or IP55). Rear panels The rear panel can be made up of: bb two parts for IP30 panels bb one reinforced part for IP55 panels. A plain door can also be used, notably for switchboards with rear connections (800 and 1000 mm deep). Side panels A set of two panels is used (IP30 or IP55). If frameworks are installed back to back (double depth), two sets of two panels are required. Roof There is a plain roof (IP30 or IP55) for each size of framework. Gland plates They are mandatory, whatever the desired degree of protection for the switchboard. For each size of framework, there are plain gland plates (IP55) or two-part gland plates (IP30).
Degree of protection
IP30 switchboard Use: bb the IP30 cover panels with a door or cover frame bb IP30 plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts). IP31 switchboard Use: b the IP30 cover panels with a door b IP30 plain roof b IP31 sealing kit b gland plates (plain or in two parts). IP55 switchboard Use: b the IP55 cover panels with a door b IP55 plain roof b plain gland plates. If frameworks are combined, use the IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations.
DD380568.eps
Cover panels
DD380569.eps
400E23000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-7
Enclosures
Cover panels
For switchboards with front connections. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).
Parts list for switchboard 1 1 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 2 08566 : front plate support frame, W = 650 3 08576 : cover frame, W = 650 4 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels) 5 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400 6 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 7
DD380607.eps
DD380554.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DD380605.eps
08403 : 08407 : 08406 : 08566 : 08513 : 08538 : 08536 : 08733 : 08738 : 08736 : 08750 : 08433 : 08438 : 08436 : 08483 : 08487 : 08486 :
framework, W = 300, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 plain door, W = 300 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) transparent door, W = 650 rear panel, W = 300 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels) set of two side panels, D = 400 plain roof, W = 300, D = 400 plain roof, W = 800, D = 400 plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400
DD380555.eps
C-8
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E23010
Enclosures
Cover panels
For switchboards with front connections. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).
08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 08566 : front plate support frame, W = 650 08578: fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a wicket door, W = 150) 08738 : rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels) 08760 : set of two side panels, D = 600 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600
DD380556.eps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DD380611.eps
08603 : 08607 : 08606 : 08566 : 08513 : 08538 : 08536 : 08733 : 08738 : 08736 : 08760 : 08633 : 08638 : 08636 : 08683 : 08687 : 08686 :
framework, W = 300, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 plain door, W = 300 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) transparent door, W = 650 rear panel, W = 300 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels) set of two side panels, D = 600 plain roof, W = 300, D = 600 plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 plain roof, W = 650, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600
DD380557.eps
400E23010
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
C-9
Enclosures
Cover panels
Made up of two cubicles back-to-back. Rear connections are possible. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).
Parts list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DD380615.eps
08407 x 2 : 08406 x 2 : 08566 : 08578 : 08576 : 08518 : 08516 : 08750 x 2 : 08438 x 2 : 08436 x 2 : 08487 x 2 : 08486 x 2 : 08719 x 2 :
2 frameworks, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 2 frameworks, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a wicket door, W = 150) cover frame, W = 650 plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) plain door, W = 650 2 sets of two side panels, D = 400 2 plain rooves, W = 800, D = 400 2 plain rooves, W = 650, D = 400 2 plain gland plates W = 800, D = 400 2 plain gland plates W = 650, D = 400 double depth combination kit
Dd382572.eps
C-10
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
400E23010
Enclosures
Cover panels
Made up of two cubicles back-to-back. Rear connections are possible. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).
Parts list for IP30 switchboard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 08607 : 08606 : 08407 : 08406 : 08566 : 08538 : 08536 : 08518 : 08516 : 08760 : 08750 : 08638 : 08636 : 08438 : 08436 : 08687 : 08686 : 08487 : 08486 : 08719 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) transparent door, W = 650 plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) plain door, W = 650 set of two side panels, D = 600 set of two side panels, D = 400 plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 plain roof, W = 650, D = 600 plain roof, W = 800, D = 400 plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 double depth combination kit
DD380613.eps
Dd382573.eps
Parts list for IP55 switchboard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 08607 : 08606 : 08407 : 08406 : 08566 : 08548 : 08546 : 08528 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150)
transparent door, W = 650 plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) 08526 : plain door, W = 650 08765 : set of two side panels, D = 600 08755 : set of two side panels, D = 400 08658 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 08656 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600 08458 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400 08456 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 08686 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600 08487 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 08717 x 2: IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations 08719 x 2: double depth combination kit
400E23010
Version : 2.0
16/04/2013
C-11
Enclosures
Cubicles
Frameworks
DD380572.eps
DD380573.eps
DD380800.eps
Framework width
W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
Cat. no.
08403 08404 08406 08408 08407
08407.
b composition of catalogue numbers: vv two frames (with two additional uprights for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles for the vv mounting plates and to separate the busbar compartment) vv four cross-pieces vv mounting hardware vv side-by-side combination kit bb for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right bb cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back bb can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
DD380575.eps
DD380576.eps
DD380801.eps
Framework width
W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150)
Cat. no.
08603 08604 08606 08608 08607
08607.
b composition of catalogue numbers: vv two frames (three for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles), equipped with intermediate vv uprights for the mounting plates vv four cross-pieces vv mounting hardware vv side-by-side combination kit bb for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right bb cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back bb can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
Designation
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 400mm Hinged front plate support frame, W = 650mm (1) Replaces catalogue number 08504. (2) Replaces catalogue number 08506.
Cat. no.
08564 (1) 08566 (2)
b reversible for left or right-hand opening b secured at two points b can be mounted on 650 mm and 800 mm (650 + 150) wide cubicles.
08564 (1).
08566 (2).
C-12
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23100
DD380577.eps
DD380574.eps
Enclosures
Cubicles
Frameworks
Upper
Front connection Canalis NW08/16 08562 (2) Cable rear connection NW08/32 08562 (2) Front connection Canalis NW20/32 08560 (1) Rear connection cable NW08/32 08560 (1) (1) 1/3 Hinged cover frame supports - 10 modules. (2) 1/3 Hinged cover frame supports - 12 modules.
Dd384637.eps Dd384638.eps
08562
08560
Dd384639.eps
08560
08560
08562
08562
08562
08562
08562
Framework combinations
DD380751.eps
Side-by-side
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit comprising six M6 bolts. To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed between the combined cubicles. Designation Cat. no.
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (1 kit per combination)
Dd381325.eps
08717
Back-to-back
Designation
Double depth combination kit
Cat. no.
08719
b The kit is made up of: bb a set of hardware for the mechanical connections between the cross-pieces bb two assembly plates to connect the uprights bb the IP55 sealing kit.
Dd381326.eps
Accessories
Dd381327.eps Dd383048.eps
Designation
Set of 20 screws + wing nuts for framework Set of 10 screws + combination accessories
Cat. no.
08921 08718
400E23100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-13
Enclosures
Cubicles
Front panels
DD380582.eps DD380583.eps
Door, W = 650/800 mm
Designation
Plain door Transparent door W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm
Cat. no.
08516 08518 08536 08538
bb reversible for left or right-hand opening bb equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.
Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.
08536.
08538.
DD383936.eps
DD380581.eps
Cover frame
Designation
Cover frame W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm (650 +150) (1) Replaces catalogue number 08554. (2) Replaces catalogue number 08556. (3) Replaces catalogue number 08558.
Cat. no.
08574 (1) 08576 (2) 08578 (3)
Note: for 800 mm wide frameworks, the 650 mm frame is supplied with a plain wicket door, 150 mm wide.
08576 (1).
08578 (3).
Designation
Cat. no.
08513 08514 08534 08593 08594
bb reversible for left or right-hand opening bb equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.
Note: fhe door with cut-out can be equipped with front plates for 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 instruments, see page A-68.
08513.
08593.
C-14
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23100
Enclosures
Cubicles
Rear panels
DD380603.eps
Rear panel
Rear panel
Designation
b made up of two half panels with vents b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
Cat. no.
08738.
Dd382566.eps
Plain door
Plain door
Designation
Cat. no.
bb equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25. b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright. 08518.
Side Panels
DD380600.eps
Side panels
Set of two side panels
Designation
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
08750 08760
Cat. no.
Left or right combinations of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600). Designation
Set of two side panels for L combinations 08750. D = 400 mm
08756
Cat. no.
Roof
DD380601.eps
Designation
Plain IP30 roof, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm
Cat. no.
08433 08434 08436 08438 08633 08634 08636 08638
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners for mounting on the framework b with markings for cut-outs, if necebbbssary.
08438.
IP Sealing kit
The kit is made up of a self-adhesive gasket that attaches to the roof and a deflector. It ensures the IP31 degree of protection for a 650 or 800 mm wide cubicle, or for two cubicles (800 + 400) when they are equipped with plain or transparent front doors. Designation Cat. no.
IP31 sealing kit 08711
400E23100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-15
Enclosures
Cubicles
Front panels
DD380582.eps DD380583.eps
Door, W = 650/800 mm
Designation
Plain door Transparent door W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm
Cat. no.
08526 08528 08546 08548
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b reversible for left or right-hand opening b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.
Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.
08546.
08548.
DD380584.eps
Door, W = 300/400 mm
Designation
Plain door Transparent door W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 400 mm
Cat. no.
08523 08524 08544
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b reversible for left or right-hand opening b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.
08523.
C-16
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23100
Enclosures
Cubicles
Rear panels
DD380599.eps
Rear panel
Rear panel
Designation
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b supplied with mounting hardware b one-piece, reinforced panel designed to ensure the degree of protection.
Cat. no.
08743 08744 08746 08748
08748.
Dd382566.eps
Plain door
Plain door
Designation
Cat. no.
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25. reversible for left or right-hand opening.
08528. Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.
Side panels
DD380600.eps
Side panels
Set of two side panels
Designation
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b supplied with mounting hardware.
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
08755 08765
Cat. no.
08755.
b these panels simply replace the standard side panels b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket.
Dd381328.eps Dd381329.eps
Roof
DD380601.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
08458.
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b supplied with mounting hardware b with markings for clear identification of cable-running zones, if necessary. 16/04/2013
400E23100
Version : 3.0
C-17
Enclosures
Cubicles
Plinth
Gland plates
Dd381334.eps
Cat. no.
08483 08484 08486 08487 08488 08683 08684 08686 08687 08688
08486.
Dd381335.eps
Cat. no.
08493 08494 08496 08497 08498 08693 08694 08696 08697 08698
08496.
Plinth, H = 100 mm
Dd381330.eps
The plinth is made up of two catalogue numbers: bb one catalogue number comprising four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and rear), that can be used in side-by-side combinations or stacked to form a plinth 200 mm high (maximum) bb one catalogue number comprising two side plates (400 or 600 mm). Each catalogue number is supplied with the necessary hardware. Designation
Four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and rear) W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
Dd381332.eps
Cat. no.
08723 08724 08726 08728 08720 08721
08726 + 08720.
Dd381331.eps
The front and rear cross-pieces can be easily removed for a pallet-mover.
C-18
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23100
Enclosures
Cubicles
Cubicle handling and rolling base Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles
Cubicle handling and rolling base
DD383845.eps
50
L 08714 + 08705.
DD383849.eps
This type of base is designed to avoid any risk of cubicle deformation during transport and handling. Five different catalogue numbers offer 27 width possibilities (1200 to 3050 mm) for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles. bb Two catalogue numbers each include 2 end-pieces for handling bases for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. bb Three catalogue numbers each include 2 lengths for the sides of handling bases for 1200 to 3050 mm wide cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. Handling bases can be used for both side-by-side and back-to-back cubicle combinations. In this case, the mounting hardware for one of the sets is used. Designation
2 cubicle handling base end-pieces 2 cubicle handling base side-lengths D = 400 mm D = 600 mm W = 1200 to 900 mm W = 2000 to 2550 mm W = 2650 to 3030 mm
Cat. no.
08714 08716 08705 08706 08707
Combined cubicles equipped with a handling base can be moved easily and safely on rollers.
DD380652.eps
08716
08705
DD383840.eps
Kit 08722 is recommended for lifting combined cubicles and can be used together with handling base end-pieces 08714 or 08716 for severe transport or handling conditions. Catalogue number 08722 includes 3 reinforcement brackets for 400 or 600 mm deep cubicles and the corresponding mounting hardware. Designation
Lifting reinforcement kit W = 400/600 mm
Cat. no.
08722
DD383839.eps
08722
08722
08722
650
400
800
800
800
300
400E23100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-19
Enclosures
Cubicles
Right-angle kit
Metal duct
Designation
Used to create and protect the connection of horizontal busbars between two cubicles installed at right angles. Cat. no.
08713 IP30 right-angle kit
Dd381337.eps
C-20
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23100
Enclosures
Installation accessories
Lifting rings
Dd381541.eps
Set of four lifting rings screwed to the framework. Use a set of lifting rings for each framework (W = 650 and 800 mm) containing devices. When two cubicles with devices have been combined, use a lifting beam. Designation Cat. no.
4 lifting rings 08700
b can be installed and removed without removing the roof b even if they are left attached, the switchboard conserves its original degree of protection.
Dd381542.eps Dd381543.eps
Positions of the lifting rings for two combined cubicles containing devices. In this case, a lifting beam must be used.
Designation
Stabiliser kit
Cat. no.
08701
b made up of four blocks under the framework b suitable for all types of cubicles, whatever the width and depth b increases the stability of the cubicle during mounting of devices b makes possible cubicle handling using a pallet mover or a forklift b protects the front, side and rear cover panels during handling b can be reused.
Levelling kit
Dd381545.eps
Designation
Levelling kit (set of 4 fixtures)
Cat. no.
08702
b can be installed at any time, even when the cubicle is already in position b maximum adjustment range = 10 mm v secures the cubicle to the floor.
Dd381549.eps Dd381550.eps
400E23210
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-21
Enclosures
Installation accessories
Designation
Floor/wall fixing kit
Cat. no.
08704
b made up of two brackets and four clamps b can be used to offset the switchboard fixing points for easier access b the wall brackets ensure sufficient wall clearance (at least 30 mm) for natural convection.
Dd381554.eps
Dd381553.eps
At least 30 mm of clearance between the wall and a cubicle with a vented rear panel is required for natural convection.
Designation
False floor fixing kit
Cat. no.
08703
b made up of four independent clamps b clamp on U sections (H = 175 mm, W = 70 mm) or I sections (H = 120 mm, W=64 mm) b clamp travel = 11 mm.
Dd381552.eps
To add a Prisma P cubicle to an existing Prisma PH installation, use the following combination kit Designation Cat. no.
Prisma PH/Prisma P side-by-side combination kit 01198 When combining Prisma PH and Prisma P IP55 enclosures, use the IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (08717) together with the side-by-side combination kit (01198).
DD385278.eps
Prisma PH
Prisma P
300-700-900
To add a Prisma P cubicle to an existing Prisma P installation, use the following combination kit and a 400 mm wide frame. Designation Cat. no.
Prisma P/Prisma P side-by-side combination kit 01199
C-22
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23210
Enclosures
Designation
Front plate hinge kit (set of 2 hinges)
Cat. no.
08585
Blanking plates
DD384029.eps
Cat. no.
03220 03221
DD384030.eps
Cat. no.
03249 03222
OK
DD384091.eps
OK e Mod
OK e
Mod
OK e
Mod
10 lines, 900 mm long and 7 mm thick 10 outgoing arrows 10 incoming arrows 10 transformers 10 earth symbols
Designation
Black
01005 01006 01007 01008 01009
400E00120
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
C-23
Enclosures
Designation
Switchboard identification plate
Cat. no.
08900
Identification labels
DD383974.eps
Clip-on labels
Clip-on labels The clip-on support is supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.It clips onto the front plate horizontally or vertically and can be screwed to any support (plain door, plain front plate, etc.). Engraving plates Supplied separately, these plates simply replace the paper labels. Cat. no. selection
T LIGH
Clip-on label.
Designation
12 clip-on labels 18 x 35 18 x 72 25 x 85 18 x 35 18 x 72 25 x 85
Cat. no.
08913 08915 08917 08914 08916 08918
Dd383975.eps
12 engraving plates
T LIGH
DD384031.eps
Engraving plate.
DD381715.eps
Adhesive labels
The adhesive label holders are supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover. Designation Cat. no.
12 label holders, W = 180 mm 12 label holders, W = 432 mm H = 24 mm H = 36 mm H = 24 mm H = 36 mm 08905 08906 08903 08904
Symbol sheets Each sheet comprises adhesive symbols that can be positioned on the identificationlabels to immediately identify the type of circuit. Standard symbols: b loads: sockets, lights, heating units, etc. b rooms: bedroom, bathroom, etc. Special symbols:loads: b lightning arrestor, gate, swimming pool, etc. b rooms: technical room, computer room, etc. Cat. no. selection Designation
Standard symbols. Set of ten symbol sheets standard standard special
DD381751.eps
Cat. no.
13735 13736
DD381752.eps
DD381753.eps
C-24
Version : 2.1
16/04/2013
400E00120
Enclosures
Enclosure accessories
Door handles and locks
Handles
DD384362.eps DD384363.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
08932
DD384364.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
08933
DD384365.eps
Ral 7016 standard handle Can be equipped with all the barrel locks and inserts presented below.
Designation
Cat. no.
08931
The barrel locks and inserts below can be mounted on handle 08930 and on all the door handles of the Prisma P range after removing the standard barrel lock (key no. 405). Cat. no. Designation
Barrel locks Barrel lock +1 keys no. 405 Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 455 Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 1242E Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 3113A Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 2433A Barrel lock + 2 keys no.2432E Inserts DIN double bar insert Screwdriver slot insert 6.5 mm male triangle insert 7 mm male triangle insert 8 mm male triangle insert 9 mm male triangle insert 6 mm male square insert 7 mm male square insert 8 mm male square insert 6 mm female square insert 08940 08941 08942 08943 08944 08956 08945 08946 08947 08948 08949 08950 08951 08952 08953 08955
Padlocking
DD384367.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
08938
The kit can be installed on the door handles of the Prisma P range equipped with any of the barrel locks and inserts above.
400E23060
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-25
Enclosures
Enclosure accessories
Earthing braid
DD384368.eps
Earthing braid, 6 mm
Designation
Cat. no.
08910
08910.
DD381338.eps
b The braid is equipped with a 4 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug on the other. It is used to earth: b a door or wicket door with devices b a front-plate support frame equipped with switchgear in a cubicle.
Designation
Cat. no.
08911
The wire is equipped with a 5 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug on the other. The earthing wire is used to earth: b a door or wicket door with devices b a front-plate support frame equipped with switchgear in a cubicle. Highly recommended for mounting on doors of System P cubicles.
DD384368.eps DD384052.eps
08911. 08911.
Touch-up accessories
DD385306.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
08961
Drawing holder
DD381208.eps
Designation
Cat. no.
08963
C-26
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23060
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories
Ventilation
In most cases and notably for IP30 switchboards, the heat dissipation by convection takes place naturally and does not require fans. However, when the switchboard is installed in temperate environments or when the degree of protection is high (IP54), ventilation accessories are indispensable.
For more in-depth information on selecting air-conditioning accessories and the thermal management of switchboards. > page D-80 to page D-87.
Front plate
03890 7 modules H = 350 mm Front plate with cut-out. Degree of protection: IP30. -
03891 03895 1 vertical module, 3 vertical modules, H = 50 mm H = 150 mm Degree of protection: IP30. Located at the top and bottom of the switchboard, IP30 ventilated front plates facilitate natural convection in the switchboard. 250 cm2 80 cm2
Fan
PB501053_35.eps
NSYCVF560M230PF - NSYCVF850M230PF NSYCAG291LPF bb Generally installed at the bottom of floor-standing enclosures: bb by cutting out a side panel; bb or by using the front plate with cut-out for fan or grill, directly clipped on (03890). The set comprises the fan with a grill and a filter. bb Power rating: 68/85 W. bb Input voltage: 230 V (50/60 Hz). bb Noise level: 59 db. bb Degree of protection: IP54. bb Weight: 3.2 kg. bb Unimpeded throughput: 562 m3/h (50 Hz), 586 m3/h (60 Hz). bb Throughput with counterpressure (grill + standard filter, cat. no. 08988): 473 m3/h (50 Hz), 477 m3/h (60 Hz). bb RAL 7035. bb Material: ABS.
DB300475EN.eps DB300474.eps DB300476.eps
Supplied with standard filter. bb Maximum throughput 350 m3/h. bb Degree of protection: IP54. bb RAL 7035. bb Material: ABS.
336
290.7 A
291 x 291
DD385319.eps
Dimensions
18
18
A 225
9.5
B 160.5 192
316 B 9.5
280
Standard filters
Fine filters
400E23070
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-27
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories
Roof fan
Dd381725.eps
Presentation A roof with a cut-out (IP31) can also be equipped with one or two fans. It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust or falling objects. It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm 08476 08676 08986
Fan characteristics Power rating: 35 W. Input voltage: 230 V. Noise level: 52 dB. Throughput: 300 m3/h.
Dd382315.eps Dd381648.eps
C-28
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E23070
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories
Heating elements
The resistors prevent condensation, corrosion and superficial leakage currents. They maintain a positive temperature in the enclosures when external temperatures drop very low. Install heaters according to the desired power level at the bottom of the enclosure, respect a safety area of a least 10 cm around the device. Vertical installation is recommended to ensure optimum convection. The resistance heaters are equipped with a PTC - type sensor (positive temperature coefficient). Thanks to these heaters, the surface temperature stabilises at 75 C when the ambient is at -5 C.
Heating resistor
PB501146_32.eps PB501025.eps
NSYCR55WU2 NSYCR100WU2 55 W 90 W bb Vertical mounting. bb Aluminium case with fins. bb Temperature: vv turns off at 60 C, vv turns on at 25-30 C (temperature of the resistor itself). bb Equipped with a symetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on). bb Input voltage: 110-250 V.
NSYCR250W230VV 250 W bb Vertical mounting. bb Aluminium case with fins. bb Temperature: vv turns off at 60 C, vv turns on at 25-30 C (temperature of the resistor itself). bb Equipped with a symetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on). bb Input voltage: 230 V.
Regulating
Used to control the temperature inside electrical switchboards in conjunction with heating resistors and fans. This thermostat can control the activation of a fan and a heater and regulate their temperature independently. Double adjustable thermostat Double temperature control with a resistance heater and a fan with separate operation bb Red button: with normally closed contact (NC) for controlling the resistance heaters. bb Blue button: with normally open contact (NO) for controlling the fans, signalling systems or alarms.
Thermostat
PB501162_30.eps
NSYCCOTHD bb Setting range: 0 C to +60 C. bb Power rating: 30 W bb Input voltage: 120 V AC, 15 A - 230 V AC, 10 A bb Fixing: clips onto a modular rail.
400E23070
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-29
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
Frameworks, D = 400 mm
Dd381875.eps Dd381822.eps Dd381823.eps Dd381826.eps
Frameworks, D = 600 mm
Dd381824.eps Dd381825.eps
Dd381827.eps
Fixing to floor
Without plinth
Dd381829.eps Dd381830.eps
Dd381893.eps
C-30
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E31000
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
Width
Dd381833.eps
Depth
Dd382324.eps
Door
Dd381834.eps
Dd382325.eps
IP30 door
Dd381835.eps Dd381836.eps
IP55 door
Dd381837.eps Dd381828.eps
400E31000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-31
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
2000 A - 2500 A
DD384599.eps
3200 A - 4000 A
60 23 2000
100 31 2000
150 31
2000
DD384545.eps
DD384546.eps
DD384547.eps
DD384548.eps
DD384550.eps
DD384551.eps
DD384552.eps
DD384553.eps
99
2000 A - 2500 A
DD384595.eps DD384596.eps
99
3200 A - 4000 A
99
99
99
249 300
159
C-32
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
DD384549.eps
400E31000
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
630 A.
Dd381859.eps Dd381860.eps
800 A.
1000 A.
1250 A.
1600 A.
Dd381865.eps
400E31000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-33
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
Dd381872.eps
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
B C B C
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
B C B C
C-34
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E31000
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
Dd384559.eps
Dd384558.eps
400E31000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
C-35
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
Dd381846.eps
Dd381847.eps
Dd381848.eps
Dd381845.eps
C-36
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E31000
Additional information
Contents
After-sales support
D-4
D-8
Power monitoring solutions D-9 Local supervision - Switchboard display units D-10 Remote supervision - Transparent Ready D-11 Remote supervision PowerLogic PowerView D-12 Power monitoring solutions D-13 Installation D-15 Improving power quality Additional equipment to optimise electrical installations
D-8 D-9
D-16
D-16 D-17
D-18
D-18 D-21 D-23 D-24
D-18 D-21 D-22
Designing horizontal busbars Designing Linergy LGY busbars Designing vertical flat busbars
Linergy LGYE Linergy BS Designing vertical Linergy BS busbars Prefabricated connections for Linergy LGY busbars
D-24 D-25 D-26 D-27 D-30 D-31 D-32 D-34 D-36 D-38 D-39 D-41 D-43 D-44 D-45 D-47 D-48 D-49
D-27
D-30
D-50 D-51 D-52 D-53 D-55 D-57 D-59 D-61 D-62 D-64 D-66 D-1
400E50040
Version : 3.1
Contents
Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL - Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL - Horizontal Linergy BS bars Fupact INF, ISFT - Vertical Linergy LGYE busbars Fupact INF, ISFT - Vertical Linergy BS bars
D-67
Enclosure characteristics
D-71
D-71 D-78
General D-80 Example D-83 Charts D-85 Ventilation D-86 Heating D-87
D-80
Tools required for mounting and connection D-88 Cable sizes according to permissible current D-89 Connection accessories D-90 Protective circuits D-91 Connection of horizontal to vertical busbars D-93 Installation of the current transformer D-94 Installation of source changeover systems D-96 Storage recommendations D-98 Packing information D-99 Handling on the site D-100 Transport D-102 Cubicle handling and rolling base - Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles D-103 Connection of busbar trunking D-104 Connection of power cables D-105
Practical information
D-88
D-2
Version : 3.1
16/04/2013
400E50040
400E50040
Version : 3.1
16/04/2013
D-3
Additional information
After-sales support
01210
4 Linergy BW accessories, 630A 2 end plugs 5 2 metal angle brackets 2 brackets for support 2 hexagonal blocks 2 2 self-tapping screws 2 IPxxB clipon covers for Linergy BW 01201 01211
01202
01109
Framework accessories
DD384562.EPS
Framework accessories 4 top sealing components 4 bottom sealing components 4 bottom cross-piece plugs
01104
DD384563.EPS
1 2
Mounting hardware D=400mm or D=600mm framework 2 adjacent mounting spacer tubes 2 washers 4 bottom cross-piece plugs Mounting hardware (2)
01108
D-4
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E24000
Additional information
After-sales support
Front-plate accessories
DD384564.EPS
01093
DD384582.eps
01094
Accessory
DD384565.EPS
01110
01130
24 flat washers 22
Rear accessories
DD384566.EPS
Accessories (IP55) 2 roof/rear panel spacers 6 rear panel spacers 4 IP55 framework plugs 3 white grommet plugs
01101
DD384578.EPS
Rear panel accessories 2 IP30 roof and rear panel fixing systems 8 IP30 rear panel fixing systems
01106
400E24000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-5
Additional information
After-sales support
01100
DD384568.EPS
Accessories for IP55 side panel 16 fixing system IP55 16 cage nuts
01102
DD384569.EPS
Accessories for IP55 roof 4 lifting ring plugs 6 sheet metal nuts
01103
Roof accessories
Roof accessories
DD384570.EPS
01112
4 lifting ring plugs 6 IP30 roof and rear panel fixing systems
01123
D-6
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E24000
Additional information
After-sales support
Framework accessory
Framework accessories
DD384608.EPS
CS frame bottom cross-member W400 to be used with old model 08504 CS frame bottom cross-member W650 to be used with old model 08506 CS frame bottom cross-member W150 + 650 to be used with old model 08506 CS frame bottom cross-member W650 + 150 to be used with old model 08506
DD384572.EPS
Frame bottom cross-member W400 to use with 08564 Frame bottom cross-member W650 to use with 08566 Frame bottom cross-member W150+650 to use with 08566 Frame bottom cross-member W650+150 to use with 08566 (1) Spare parts on stock in RAL 9001 only.
Door accessories
DD384617.eps
Closing accessories 1 2 3 Screw THF M6 x 16 Stop rod 1/4 turn stud Stop doors Hinge pins 4 5 6 Captive nut for frame
01105
DD384573.EPS
01221
5 6
400E24000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-7
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
Energy efficiency the easy way. Prisma P contributes to energy efficiency by integrating electrical installation supervision solutions. Simple and fast access to key information concerning the electrical equipment makes it possible to: b monitor electrical network status to maintain power quality b adjust power quality b optimise electrical networks using suitable equipment
All the proposed energy-efficiency solutions have been designed for use with Prisma P. This ensures easy installation and operation, compatible front plates and mounting plates, fast and easy connections, etc.
A comprehensive approach
The new energy-efficiency solutions are accompanied by catalogues and guides covering aspects such as special software and communicating devices.
DD384063.eps PD390180-50_SE.eps
D-8
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E15000
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
Schneider Electric's comprehensive approach to power monitoring makes it possible to supervise installation status in real time.
Two solution levels cover the needs of all types of electrical installations. A. Local supervision for all types of installations via switchboard display units b Display of data, e.g. current, voltage, power and energy in real time. b Improved operation via alarms indicating equipment problems. B. Remote supervision for small to mid-sized installations with Transparent Ready and PowerLogic PowerView solutions b Display of data, e.g. current, voltage, power, power factor, energy and harmonics in real time. b Data recording for trend analysis. b Curve plotting and preparation of reports
Size of installation
Transparent Ready
Local supervision
Remote supervision
400E15000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-9
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
Switchboard display units are a simple, low-cost solution for basic monitoring of electrical switchboards. They can be rapidly installed for direct readout of data through specially designed front plates.
The FDM121 displays the measurement, alarm and operating information of the intelligent functional unit. b Surface mounting using a fixing accessory (requires door drilling). b Installation in door cutout using clips.
PB391291-57.eps
Designation
03911 03908
Cat. no.
PE86158-37.eps
Dd381711.eps
PowerMeter devices are compatible with all intelligent functional units via their Modbus communication port (except Compact NSX) and can also be used as an interface between the communication gateway and the intelligent device to combine both local and remote monitoring.
Designation
03913
Cat. no.
DD383662.eps
D-10
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E15000
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
Transparent Ready is the Schneider Electric solution to access information without specific software. With a simple interface and a standard web browser, users can choose the information they want to display via web pages.
DD384063.eps
Functions
b Energy management using Transparent Ready to forward information on current, voltage, power factor, etc. b Equipment management through monitoring of equipment state and maintenance needs. b Monitoring of power quality with a full panorama of energy characteristics that are updated daily.
DD384066_SE.eps
Typical solution
b Intelligent devices. b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX. b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard. b Connection of the entire network to an EGX400 communication gateway including web pages and an Ethernet connection.
400E15000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-11
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
PowerLogic PowerView is a complete power monitoring solution for small to midsized sites. The software, easy to install and use, includes the drivers required for serial and Ethernet connections. It is ideal for monitoring small to mid-sized sites.
PE86106.eps
Functions
Energy management with real-time display of current, voltage, power, power factor, energy, demand power, demand current and total harmonic distortion (THD). b Supervision of equipment and preventive maintenance. b Strategic planning to avoid system down time. b Display of curves in Excel. b Preparation of reports.
Typical solution
Serial link b Intelligent devices. b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard. b Connection of switchboard to local Modbus network. Ethernet link b Intelligent devices. b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX. b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard. b Connection of switchboard via an EGX100 communication gateway to the b Ethernet network.
DD384067_SE.eps
D-12
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E15000
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
Communicating devices
PB103208-33.eps PB100708_20_SE.eps
Intelligent functional units (e.g. Masterpact, Compact NSX) in the switchboard can provide power monitoring functions without any additional installation requirements. Prisma P is perfectly suited in terms of device layout, installation on mounting plates, use of specially designed front plates, etc. Device Designation
Masterpact Compact NSX Installation See page A-5 See page A-23
PM710.
Other intelligent functional units from the motor control range such as TeSys U are also very easy to install and set up.
Note: for more information, see pages 212-213 in the catalogue and the catalogue Contrle Commande Moteur
DB107849.eps
M 3
Compact NSX devices require a Modbus interface module for data transmission. The devices are installed on a stacking accessory that can be clip-mounted on a modular rail.
Device Installation No. of vertical modules Modular rail Modular front plate 03204
Designation
Modbus interface Module 4 03401 Note: Modbus interface modules are set up either manually or using RSU software (see the ULP guide).
Communication gateway
DB107851_33_SE.eps
For remote operation, the Prisma P intelligent-switchboard offers two communication gateways, the EGX100 and 400. The EGX400 is also a web server with a 16 MB memory. They transmit data over Ethernet networks and can be easily installed in the switchboard on a modular rail.
Device Installation No. of vertical modules 4 5 Modular rail Modular front plate 03204 03205
Designation
EGX100 EGX400 EGX100.
PB100704_68_SE.eps
03401 03401
EGX400.
400E15000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-13
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
PowerLogic CM3000 and CM4000 circuit monitors are high-performance power monitoring units that can be installed on incoming devices, at the head of the switchboard, or on critical outgoing circuits. They offer a wide range of measurement possibilities and integrate easily in supervision systems thanks to their Ethernet capabilities and on-board web server. They are Transparent Ready.
Functions
b Recording of electrical installation parameters. b Cost control. b Power quality improvement and reduced downtime
Installation
Device No. of vertical Mounting modules plate Cut-out front Plain front plate plate
DD381716.eps
Circuit Monitor CM
4 4
03571 03572
03918 03918
03804 03806
Powerlog 4000 CM
ic system
D-14
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E15000
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
Simple wiring makes for fast and easy installation of the supervision system in the switchboard. Schneider Electric provides all the tools required to produce intelligent switchboards while maintaining the criteria that make Prisma P stand out, i.e. safety, quality and simplicity.
DD384055.eps
Masterpact NW 2500A
PM 800
Tesys U
Tesys U
Example of a communication network in a switchboard combining power distribution and motor control.
Wiring rules
E20543.eps
Some care is required in setting up a communicating circuit in a switchboard. The cables must be as short as possible to avoid loops that cause stray currents generated by magnetic fields. For more information on wiring rules, please see the installation guide.
400E15000
IFM
Rseau Modbus
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-15
D-16 To improve power quality, Schneider Electric proposes two power-factor correction systems, VarplusCan. Both are designed for optimum installation in Prisma P.
DD384583.EPS
Additional information
Installation
Prisma P enclosures are designed for installation of the new VarplusCan powerfactor correction modules that improve the quality of the electrical distribution system and reduce consumption of reactive energy. The modules are made up of capacitors, contactors and devices protecting against internal faults.
Version : 3.0
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France
16/04/2013
G FE D C B A
400E15000
Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P
During design or during subsequent operation, electrical installations are increasingly outfitted with components designed to optimise energy consumption. With Prisma P, most of these products can already be added to the switchboard. By limiting the temperature within the switchboard, it is possible to extend the life of the equipment and optimise its use. In addition, electricity consumption is reduced because equipment in good condition has lower losses.
Heaters
Dd381666.eps Dd381667.eps
Heaters contribute to equipment optimisation by limiting condensation, corrosion and, above all, leakage currents along surfaces.
Fans
DD381703.eps Dd382315.eps
Several types of fans are available: enclosure wall or roof-mount versions. They are particularly useful for switchboards installed in temperate environments or when the degree of protection of the enclosure is high (IP55).
Thermostat
Dd381668.eps
Thermostats are used to limit the temperature inside switchboards when heaters and fans are installed, thus reducing heat losses.
Installation
DD384054.eps
400E15000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-17
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Prisma P takes into account the installation and connection conditions of Schneider Electric devices. The entire installation complies with standard IEC 60439-1. The result is a type tested switchboard.
PD390311_SE.eps
Busbar sizing
The factors that must be taken into account in determining the size of busbars include: b the diversity factor. Not all the loads supplied by a set of busbars are used at full rated load or at the same time. The diversity factor is the means to determine the maximum load current used to size the busbars. Standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 4.7 specifies the table below.
2 and 3 4 and 5 6 to 9 10 and more
Number of circuits
Diversity factor
b the degree of protection IP. b the ambient temperature around the switchboard.
D-18
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E42000
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Busbars
DD381459.eps DD381460.eps
b To determine the size of upstream and downstream connections for devices, see the tables starting on page D-30 They can be used to determine: b the size of copper busbars b the maximum permissible current. As a function of: b the type of circuit breaker b the IP value b the ambient temperature around the switchboard b the type of installation.
400E42000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-19
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Example v Isc = 36 kA rms C the value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phase-to-phase fault current (standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 8.4.3.2.3 and 10.11.5.6), i.e.: 36 x 0.6 = 21.6 kA v maximum time delay for the control unit: 0.5 s v k = 143 for copper conductors with PVC insulation. The calculation is therefore: SPE =
2 21600 x 0,5 = 106,8 mm 143 2
b or the Schneider Electric table based on the standard. To determine the required size of the PEN conductor, see page D-49.
D-20
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E42000
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Up to 4000 A
Linergy LGYE Profil
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Size per phase Linergy LGYE 630 Linergy LGYE 800 Linergy LGYE 1000 Linergy LGYE 1250 Linergy LGYE 1600 Linergy LGYE 2000 Linergy LGYE 2500 Linergy LGYE 3200 Linergy LGYE 4000
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 680 580 650 550 630 860 1080 1350 1730 2200 2640 3400 3800 740 920 1150 1580 1810 2230 3020 3510 830 1040 1300 1690 2100 2540 3300 3710 710 884 1100 1530 1730 2160 2900 3430 800 1000 1250 1650 2000 2440 3200 3620
IP > 31 530 680 850 1050 1480 1650 2100 2800 3350
IP > 31 500 630 790 1000 1380 1560 2000 2660 3180
IP > 31 470 600 750 930 1300 1480 1930 2520 3020
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
100E42010
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-21
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Up to 1600 A
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 710 910 1260 1610 50 C IP y 31 660 860 1180 1510 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b
Up to 3200 A
Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1060 1240 1600 1810 2030 2500 2950 50 C IP y 31 990 1160 1500 1690 1900 2330 2750 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2 Linergy BS bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
Example Two 50 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2160 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 30 C around the switchboard. Where possible, use of 10 mm bars is worthwhile in terms of the In/Isc: b gain in time during switchboard mounting given, where applicable, the lesser number of bars installed b for short-circuits, the rigidity of the bars means fewer busbar supports. Recommendation Use 5 mm bars for In y 1600 A and low Icw values (40 kA rms). Use 10 mm bars for In > 1600 A and medium to high Icw values (> 40 kA rms).
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-22
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42010
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b
Example A Linergy LGY channelled bar can be used for a 1650 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature around the switchboard of 35 C.
IP > 31 b b b b b
DD381235.eps
DD381236.eps
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42010
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-23
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Up to 4000 A
Linergy LGYE Profil
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 680 580 650 550 630 860 1080 1350 1730 2200 2640 3400 3800 740 920 1150 1580 1810 2230 3020 3510 830 1040 1300 1690 2100 2540 3300 3710 710 884 1100 1530 1730 2160 2900 3430 800 1000 1250 1650 2000 2440 3200 3620 40 C IP y 31 590 750 940 1170 1550 1900 2310 3040 3450 45 C IP y 31 550 700 880 1100 1450 1810 2240 2890 3280 50 C IP y 31 520 660 830 1020 1350 1720 2120 2750 3120
Size per phase Linergy LGYE 630 Linergy LGYE 800 Linergy LGYE 1000 Linergy LGYE 1250 Linergy LGYE 1600 Linergy LGYE 2000 Linergy LGYE 2500 Linergy LGYE 3200 Linergy LGYELGYE 4000
IP > 31 530 680 850 1050 1480 1650 2100 2800 3350
IP > 31 500 630 790 1000 1380 1560 2000 2660 3180
IP > 31 470 600 750 930 1300 1480 1930 2520 3020
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
D-24
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42030
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 710 910 1260 1610 50 C IP y 31 660 860 1180 1510 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b
Up to 3200 A
Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1060 1240 1600 1900 1810 2030 2500 2840 2950 50 C IP y 31 990 1160 1500 1780 1690 1900 2330 2650 2750 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1 Linergy BS bar, 100 x 10 mm 2370 2150 2260 2030 2150 1900 2030 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2 x 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 3540 3200 3370 3020 3200 2820 3020 2 Linergy BS bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 1010 1160 1500 1780 1740 1870 2330 2650 2720
IP > 31 940 1070 1390 1650 1610 1720 2160 2450 2510
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b
Example Two 80 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2820 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard. Two 80 x 10 mm bars installed separately in two busbar compartments can be used for a 3200 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42030
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-25
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm IP y 31 890 1130 1580 2010 IP > 31 840 1050 1420 1820 30 C IP y 31 850 1080 1500 1920 IP > 31 790 990 1350 1720 35 C IP y 31 800 1000 1400 1800 IP > 31 750 900 1250 1600 40 C IP y 31 760 970 1350 1720 IP > 31 700 870 1180 1510 45 C IP y 31 710 910 1260 1610 IP > 31 650 810 1090 1390 50 C IP y 31 660 860 1180 1510 IP > 31 b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Up to 3200 A
Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm IP y 31 1330 1550 1990 2270 2550 3110 IP > 31 1220 1400 1800 2090 2270 2820 30 C IP y 31 1260 1470 1890 2160 2420 2970 IP > 31 1160 1320 1700 1980 2140 2660 35 C IP y 31 1200 1400 1800 2050 2300 2820 IP > 31 1080 1250 1600 1850 2000 2500 40 C IP y 31 1130 1320 1700 1930 2170 2660 IP > 31 1010 1160 1500 1740 1870 2330 45 C IP y 31 1060 1240 1600 1810 2030 2500 IP > 31 940 1070 1390 1610 1720 2160 50 C IP y 31 990 1160 1500 1690 1900 2330 IP > 31 b b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-26
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42030
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600, vertically mounted
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or withdrawable, and Linergy LGY busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1550 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1500 800 1000 1250 1550 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1500 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1450 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1400
3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04487 4P Cat. no. 04488
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330
NS630b
3P Cat. no. 04477 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS800 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS1600 3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P Cat. no. 04492 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 b b b b b
Example For a fixed Compact NS1600, 4P, where the ambient temperature around the switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31: the maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04488) is 1450 A. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards. 100E42040 Version : 3.0 16/04/2013 D-27
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16, vertically mounted
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or drawout, and Linergy LGY busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1570 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1520 800 1000 1250 1570 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1520 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1470 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1420
3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04489 4P Cat. no. 04490
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330
NT06
3P Cat. no. 04477 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT08 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT10 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT12 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT16 3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P Cat. no. 04492 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 b b b b b
Example For a drawout Masterpact NT16 , 4P, where the ambient temperature around the switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31: the maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04492) is 1380 A.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-28
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600, horizontally mounted, fixed
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and Linergy LGY busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000
NS630b
3P Cat. no. 04473 4P Cat. no. 04474 NS800 3P Cat. no. 04473 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P Cat. no. 04474 NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04473 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P Cat. no. 04474 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-29
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Fixed, top or bottom connection
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Masterpact NW08/NW40, front or rear connection, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470 Ambient temperature around the switchboard (1) 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 (1) In the case of a door mounted at the rear of cubicle, add 10 C. b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 40 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1570 45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-30
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Fixed, top or bottom connection
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 NW20 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 NW32 Size per phase 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1520 2b 60 x 10 2000 2b 80 x 10 2460 2b 100 x10 2820
IP > 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1470 2b 60 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2380 2b 100 x10 2730
IP > 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1420 2b 60 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2300 2b 100 x10 2630
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-31
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Drawout, top or bottom connection
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, drawout Masterpact NW08/NW40, front or rear connection, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard (1) 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 (1) In the case of a door mounted at the rear of cubicle, add 10 C.
Device
IP > 31 b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Device
IP > 31 b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-32
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Drawout, top or bottom connection
1 2
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 NW20 Size per phase 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830 NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140 NW32 Size per phase 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 2630 2370 2530 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
Device
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-33
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1520 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1470 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1420 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NT16 (1) I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 630 630 630 630 630 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 40 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1420
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-34
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 (1) Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1430 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1210 2b 50 x 10 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1160 2b 50 x 10 1330
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-35
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Drawout
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1430 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1230 4b 50 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1180 4b 50 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NT16 (1) I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1180 2b 80 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NT16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-36
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 (1) Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1430 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1210 1b 80 x 10 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1160 1b 80 x 10 1330
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-37
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS1600b/3200 Fixed, top or bottom connection
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Compact NS1600b/3200, front or rear connection, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 40 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1430 2b 80 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2280 3b 80 x 10 2630 45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2210 3b 80 x 10 2530 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b 80 x 10 2140 3b 80 x 10 2430
NS1600b Size per phase I (A) NS2000 Size per phase I (A) NS2500 Size per phase I (A) NS3200 Size per phase I (A)
IP > 31 b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS1600b Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 NS2000 Size per phase 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 NS2500 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 NS3200 Size per phase 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Device
IP > 31 b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-38
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Fixed
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1500 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1200 4b 50 x 5 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NS1600 (1) Size per phase I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-39
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 (1) I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1230 1b 80 x 10 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1180 1b 80 x 10 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 NS1600 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-40
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Withdrawable
1 2
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1230 4b 50 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1180 4b 50 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NS1600 (1) Size per phase I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm. b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1180 2b 80 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-41
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 (1) I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm. b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1210 1b 80 x 10 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1160 1b 80 x 10 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 NS1600 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-42
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42040
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1000 Horizontal, fixed
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
IP > 31 b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42040
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-43
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Flexible copper bars with an insulating sheath
It is imperative to use the values indicated below that have been validated for the installation of devices in Prisma P switchboards. The parameters determining the size of flexible bars are: b the environment in which the devices are installed: v position in the enclosure v dimensions of other conductors in the circuit v ambient temperature around the switchboard b the characteristics of the connected devices: v device heat losses v the type of installation (horizontal or vertical) v the type of device (fixed or withdrawable). Only the equipment manufacturer with in-depth knowledge on: bb the characteristics of the installed devices bb the configuration of the installation in the enclosure can provide the correct sizes of flexible bars for a given permissible current. Insulated, flexible bars make for easy, fast and flexible implementation up to 630 A, but higher ratings require sizes that cancel these advantages. For high Isc values, it is advised to use rigid bars which require fewer supports.
bb better insulation temperature withstand (125 C for bars, 105 C for cables) and a larger exchange surface for an equivalent size, i.e. a smaller size for a given current bb greater rigidity offering better electrodynamic characteristics for short-circuit currents bb no intermediate parts (lugs) for a direct connection between the device and the busbars therefore less temperature rise and less risk of error bb fast implementation of prefabricated connections already cut to length, formed and drilled. Technical characteristics bb thickness of the insulation: variable depending on the bar size, 2 mm on average bb rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V bb impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 12 kV bb maximum withstand temperature of insulating material = 125 C.
Connection
In all cubicles with IP y 55 bb the switchboard internal temperature is 60 C bb the withstand temperature of the insulating material is 125 C. If the withstand temperature of the insulation is only 105 C, use the next largest flexible bar. The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
(1) The values for circuit breakers apply to contactors with the same ratings.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-44
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E42060
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NSX100 to NSX630
Insulated flexible copper bars
Devices
IP y 31
NSX100 TMD-TMG NSX125 TMD-TMG NSX160 (1) TMD-TMG NSX250 (1) TMD-TMG NSX100 STR NSX160 STR NSX250 (2) STR NSX400N/H/L fixed NSX400N/H/L with Vigi NSX400N/H/L withdrawable NSX630N/H/L fixed NSX630N/H/L Vigi or withdrawable Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Size per phase Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 250 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 250 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 6 630 32 x 8 570 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 238 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 237 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 6 600 32 x 8 535
IP > 31
NSX100 TMD-TMG NSX125 TMD-TMG NSX160 (1) TMD-TMG NSX250 (1) TMD-TMG NSX100 STR NSX160 STR NSX250 (2) STR NSX400 fixed NSX400 with Vigi
NSX400 withdrawable Size per phase NSX630b fixed NSX630 Vigi or withdrawable Inc (A) Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Inc (A)
(1) For a withdrawable Compact NSX160 or NSX250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulationmonitoring module, multiply the In values by 0.9. (2) For a withdrawable Compact NSX250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module, multiply the In values by 0.86.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
400E42060
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-45
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Cables
Practical guidelines
This section doesnt concern customers loads connection (see IEC 61439-1, IEC 60364). Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the circuit breaker. The size of cables must be selected according to: b the level of current b the ambient temperature around the conductors b the degree of protection for the switchboard. The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device (permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.). They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with cover panels rated IP y 55. b switchboard internal temperature 60 C b connections using copper cables. The withstand temperature of insulating material of cable = 105C Size of cables (mm)
1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95
Device
NSX100
NSX160
NSX250
Size (mm) 25 50 95 Note: Schneider Electric recommends connecting Compact NSX400/630 circuit breakers with insulated flexible bars or rigid bars, see page D-44.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-46
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E42070
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Maximum size of lugs for connection to the different incoming connection blocks.
Standard Cu lugs Incoming connection block for Compact NSX-INS250 supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04066 and 04067 In-duct incoming connection block for Compact NSX630, cat. no. 04076 150 mm 240 mm Narrow Cu lugs 240 mm 300 mm Narrow bimetal lugs 185 mm 300 mm
DD382788.eps
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Maximum size and number of cables for connection to terminal extension bars (according to busbar drawing supplied) for customer connection of Compact NSX and Masterpact NT/NW devices.
Cable size (mm) Quantity
400E42070
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-47
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Size of PE protective conductor
DD381471.eps
bb SPE : cross-sectional area of PE in mm bb I : value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phasetophase fault current (IEC 61439-1 8.4.2.3 and 10.11.5.6) bb t : time the fault current flows in seconds bb k : coefficient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor with PVC insulation.
Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of the device Isc.
Size of PE conductor Isc y 40 kA Isc y 65 kA Isc > 65 kA All Schneider Electric devices 1 Linergy BS bar, 25 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 800
For all Schneider Electric devices for an Isc up to 85 kA: see page B-82 .
D-48
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42080
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Size of PEN protective conductor
The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.: bb for copper single-phase circuits or sized y 16mm, it must be the same size as the phase conductors bb for copper three-phase circuits sized > 16 mm, it can be: v the same size as the phase conductors v smaller on the condition that: - the current likely to flow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the permissible current for the conductor - the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10 % of the total rating. The conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.
Practical guidelines
Practical guidelines
According to standard IEC 61439-1 and 2, the practical guidelines for implementing the PEN are the following: bb at the entry to the assembly, the PEN connection must be next to the phase connections bb within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fire or explosion) bb the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral bb the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars bb the change from a TNC to a TNS system must take place at a single point in the switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop bb after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system. The PE and the neutral must meet their specific requirements.
DD384616.eps
100E42080
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-49
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600, vertically mounted
Prefabricated connections for Compact NS630b to NS1600 - Top or bottom front connection
DD383540.eps
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1550 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1500 800 1000 1250 1550 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1500 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1450 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1400
NS630b 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NS800 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NS1000 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NS1600 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330
NS630b 3P cat. no.33642 4P cat. no.33643 NS800 3P cat. no.33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P cat. no.33643 NS1000 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P cat. no.33643 NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NS1600 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-50
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Masterpact NT06 to NT16, vertically mounted
Prefabricated connections for Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - Top or bottom front connection
Dd383673.eps
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1570 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1520 800 1000 1250 1570 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1520 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1470 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1420
NT06 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NT08 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NT10 3P cat. no.33642 4P cat. no.33643 NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NT16 3P 33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
IP > 31 b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Drawout
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330
NT06 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NT08 3P cat. no. 33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P cat. no. 33643 NT10 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P cat. no.33643 NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NT16 3P 33642 + 33644 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-51
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1000, horizontally mounted, fixed
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
NS630b
3P cat. no. 04483 4P cat. no. 04484 NS800 3P cat. no. 04483 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P cat. no. 04484 NS1000 3P cat. no. 04483 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P cat. no. 04484 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 630
IP > 31 b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-52
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Fixed, top or bottom connection
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for a vertical, fixed NW08/NW40, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 50 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-53
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Fixed, top or bottom connection
Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x 10 800 1b 60x 10 1000 1b 60x 10 1250 1b 80x 10 1520 2b 80x 10 2000 2b100x10 2500 2b120x10 2910 3b120x10 3340 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x 10 800 1b 60x 10 1000 1b 60x 10 1250 1b 80x 10 1470 2b 80x 10 1950 2b100x10 2460 2b120x10 2820 3b120x10 3120 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 NW20 Size per phase 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 NW25 Size per phase 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 NW32 Size per phase 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 NW40 Size per phase 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3680 3680 3600 3600 3520 3520 3440 3440 I (A) (1) b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. (1) For NW40 IP >31, performances realized with forced ventilation.
IP > 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1250 1b 80x 10 1420 2b 80x 10 1900 2b100x10 2300 2b120x10 2630 3b120x10 3340
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NW08 1 NW10 1 NW12 1 NW16 0.98 NW20 0.98 NW25 0.97 NW32 0.97
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-54
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Drawout, top or bottom connection
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for a vertical, drawout NW08/NW40, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-55
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Drawout, top or bottom connection
Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1180 1b 80x10 1380 2b 80x10 1900 2b100x10 2210 2b120x10 2630 3b120x10 3340 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1140 1b 80x10 1330 2b 80x10 1830 2b100x10 2140 2b120x10 2530 3b120x10 3120 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 NW20 Size per phase 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 NW25 Size per phase 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 NW32 Size per phase 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 NW40 Size per phase 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3680 3680 3600 3600 3520 3520 3440 3440 I (A) (1) b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. (1) For NW40 IP >31, performances realized with forced ventilation.
IP > 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1100 1b 80x10 1280 2b 80x10 1760 2b100x10 2000 2b120x10 2370 3b120x10 3340
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NW08 1 NW10 1 NW12 1 NW16 0.98 NW20 0.98 NW25 0.97 NW32 0.97
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-56
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a customer connection for a vertical, fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1470 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1420 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1420
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1200 2b 100x5 1370
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-57
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
Size per phase I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 phase I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 phase I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 phase I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 Size per 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 phase I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
NT06
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b 1000 1b 80x10 1000 1b 80x10 1000 1b 80x10
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NT06b 1 NT08 1 NT10 1 NT12 1 NT16 0.98
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-58
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Drawout
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1230 2b 100x5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NT16 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 2b 80x5 1130 2b 100x5 1280
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-59
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10
IP > 31 b b b b b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NT06 1 NT08 1 NT10 1 NT12 1 NT16 0.98
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-60
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS1600b/3200 Fixed, top or bottom connection
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for a vertical, fixed Compact NS1600b/3200, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b100 x 10 2210 2b120 x 10 2530 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b100 x 10 2140 2b120 x 10 2430 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS1600b Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 NS2000 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 NS2500 Size per phase 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 NS3200 Size per phase 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP>31 b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-61
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Fixed
Determining the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a customer connection for a vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1200 2b 100x5 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1200 2b 100x5 1400
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 970 2b 80x5 1150 2b 100x5 1350
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-62
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
NS630b Size per phase I (A) NS800 Size per phase I (A) NS1000 Size per phase I (A) NS1250 Size per phase I (A) NS1600 Size per phase
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10
IP > 31 b b b b b
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NS630b 1 NS800 1 NS1000 1 NS1250 1 NS1600 0.98
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-63
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Withdrawable
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a rear customer connection for a vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1230 2b 100x5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330
IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 2b 80x5 1130 2b 100x5 1280
IP > 31 b b b b b
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-64
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 NS1600 Size per phase 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NS630b 1 NS800 1 NS1000 1 NS1250 1 NS1600 0.98
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
100E42500
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
D-65
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Horizontal, fixed
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied.
Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 45 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 50 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
IP > 31 b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
D-66
Version : 3.0
15/04/2013
100E42500
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Designing busbars
IP > 31 460 610 770 970 1180 1420 1680 2360 2700
IP > 31 440 580 730 910 1110 1320 1590 2220 2540
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b
100E42035
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-67
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Designing busbars
IP > 31 b b b b
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1150 1000 1080 930 1000 850 930 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 1940 1690 1840 1560 1700 1420 1560 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2170 1900 2040 1750 1900 1590 1750 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 2670 2340 2500 2160 2340 1970 2160 2 Linergy BS bars, 100 x 10 mm 3120 2750 2930 2520 2750 2310 2520 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 ISFT 160 1 Linergy BS bar, 730 680 680 630 630 570 570 50 x 10 mm ISFL 160 1 Linergy BS bar, 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 60 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 80 x 10 mm ISFL 250/400/630 1 Linergy BS bar, 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 80 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 2050 1800 1930 1680 1800 1540 1680 100 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 2390 2100 2250 1950 2100 1800 1950 120 x 10 mm b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
D-68
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42035
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Designing busbars
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Linergy LGYE 630 650 550 630 510 590 480 550 Linergy LGYE 800 840 720 800 700 760 660 720 Linergy LGYE 1000 1040 900 990 870 950 830 900 Linergy LGYE 1250 1290 1120 1230 1080 1170 1030 1100 Linergy LGYE 1600 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 1250 1320 Linergy LGYE 2000 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 1520 1620 Linergy LGYE 2500 2290 1890 2190 1840 2070 1770 1960 Linergy LGYE 3200 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 2500 2640 Linergy LGYE 4000 3320 3050 3240 2950 3140 2850 2970 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 460 610 770 970 1180 1420 1680 2360 2700
IP > 31 440 580 730 910 1110 1320 1590 2220 2540
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 680 590 630 550 590
IP > 31 530
40 C IP y 31 550
IP > 31 b b b b b b b b
Linergy LGY 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 Linergy LGY 1000 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 Linergy LGY 1250 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1030 1100 Linergy LGY 1600 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 1250 1320 Linergy LGY 2000 (2 x 1000) 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 1520 1620 Linergy LGY 2500 (2 x 1250) 2380 2120 2260 2020 2120 1900 2020 Linergy LGY 3200 (2 x 1600) 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 2500 2640 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
100E42035
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-69
Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Lateral Linergy BS busbars Fupact INF/ISFT
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT Vertical Linergy BS bars
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1000 910 970 860 910 810 860 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
IP > 31 b b b b
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1150 1000 1080 930 1000 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 1940 1690 1810 1560 1700 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2170 1900 2040 1750 1900 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 2670 2340 2500 2160 2340 2 x 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 3020 2650 2840 2450 2650
IP > 31 b b b b b b b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
D-70
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
100E42035
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
The IP and IK degrees of protection provided by an enclosure must be specified as a function of the various external influences defined by standard IEC 30364-5-51, in particular: bb presence of foreign solid bodies (code AE) bb presence of water (code AD) bb mechanical stress (code not specified) bb capability of persons (code BA) bb ... Prisma P switchboards are designed for indoor installation. Unless the rules, standards and regulations of a specific country stipulate otherwise, Schneider Electric recommends the following IP and IK values based on French guide UTE C 15-103 (March 2004).
1 Opposite the relevant premises, read the recommended IP and IK values. 2 The b symbol indicates the enclosure or cubicle satisfying the criteria of the UTE guide. Any enclosure or cubicle with a higher degree of protection can also be used. 3 If several degrees of protection are possible (refer to the standard for more details) and the v and b symbols are indicated (e.g. 24v/25b), enclosures that correspond to the higher degree of protection (b) are suitable for the lower degree of protection (v).
Type of premises
Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
Min. IP/IK required IP IK Domestic or comparable premises or locations Porch 24 07 Bathrooms (see washrooms) Bicycles, motorcycles, tricycles, etc. (premises for) Water, sewer and heating connections Laundries Cellars, garages, furnace rooms Bedrooms Trash rooms Halls in cellars Courtyards Kitchens Shower rooms (see washrooms) Indoor stairways and alleys 20 02/07 07 02 02 02/07 02 02/07 02 07 20 23 21 20 20 25 20 24/25 20 07 02 02 02/07 02 07 07 02/07 02
IP30/IK07
IP43/IK08
b b b b b b b b b b
Outdoor stairways and outdoor alleys 24 without roofs Outdoor alleys with roofs Attics (roof space) Garden shelters Latrines Dustbin rooms Ironing room Access ramps to garages 21 20 24/25 20 25 20 25
b b b b b b b
400E43010
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-71
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Type of premises
Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK 27 02 24 23 21 20 21 21 20 20 23 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 07 08 07 07 07 07 02 08 07 02 02 02 07 07 02/07 07 07 07 07 02 08 08 07 07 07 02 02 02 08 07 02 07 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
IP43/IK08
Washrooms, rooms volume 0 containing a bathtub or volume 1 shower volume 2 volume 3 Lounges, living rooms, etc Drying rooms Covered terraces WCs Verandas Crawl spaces
Commercial premises and adjoining areas Gunsmiths (storage area, workshop) 30 Laundries (wash room) Butchers shop cold room y -10 C Bakers, cake shops (kitchens) Coffee roasters Coal, wood, oil Delicatessen (production) Sweets (production) Shoe repair shops Dairies Hardware stores (storage areas for chemicals and paint) Wood workers Art galleries Florists Furriers Fruit and vegetable merchants Grain shops Bookshops, stationers Motorcycle and bicycle repairs and accessories Messenger services Furniture shops (antiques, secondhand) Glass and mirror merchants (workshop) Wallpaper shop (storage area) Cosmetics shop (storage area) Chemists (storage area) Photographers (dark room) Plumbers (storage area) Fishmongers Dry cleaners Hardware stores (without paint, chemicals, etc.) Locksmiths Vintners, spirits Interior decorator (carding) Tailors, clothing retailers (storage area) Pet care 24 24 23 50 21 20 24 20 20 24 33 50 20 24 20 24 50 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 23 20 25 23 20 20 20 50 20 35
07 v/08b v 07 07 02 07 b
D-72
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E43010
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Type of premises
Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
IP43/IK08
Buildings open to the general public Shared premises of storage rooms buildings open to the packing rooms general public archive rooms film and magnetic media storage linen rooms laundry rooms misc. shops kitchens (large) J L Reception old and handicapped people Lecture halls, halls meeting rooms, stage areas auditoriums, scenery storage halls used for several purposes rooms costume rooms Retail premises, sales premises shopping malls areas for storage and handling of packing Restaurants and cafes Hotels and boarding houses Dance halls and gaming parlours Teaching classrooms establishments, holiday camps dormitories Libraries and documentation centres Exhibitions halls and rooms areas for reception of equipment and merchandise U Healthcare establishments bedrooms incineration operating rooms centralised sterilisation
20 20 20 20 20 24 21 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
08 08 02 02 02 07 07/08 02 02/07 08 08 07 08 08 b b b b b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
N O P R
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 20 24
08 02 07 02 08 02 02 07 02 07/08 07 02/07 b b b b b b b
S T
b b b v b
pharmacies and labs 21v/23b 02v/07b with more than 10 l of inflammable liquids V W X Places of worship Administrative premises, banks Indoor sports facilities halls 20 20 20 02 02 08 02 08 08 08v/10b b b b b
07v/08b v
Y PA
23v/25b 08v/10b
b b b
400E43010
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-73
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Type of premises
Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
IP43/IK08
Technical premises Battery rooms Lifts (machine rooms and pulley rooms) Electrical rooms Control rooms Workshops Laboratories Air conditioning washers Garages (used exclusively for parking vehicles) of an area not exceeding 100 m2 Machine rooms Water pressurisers Boiler rooms coal fuel other fuel electrical Fuel storage areas Cinder tips Pump rooms Pressure reduction rooms (gas) Steam or hot water facilities Expansion vessel room Parking lots Carwash areas (inside premises) Petrol stations inside outside Lubrication areas Battery recharging areas Workshops Offices Libraries Archives Computer rooms Design offices Rooms containing reprographic machines Sorting rooms Refectories in restaurants or canteens Large kitchens Sports rooms Barracks Meeting rooms Waiting rooms, lounges, halls Medical consulting rooms, not fitted with specific equipment Demonstration and exhibition rooms coal oil liquefied gas
23 20 20 20
02/07 07v/08b v 07 02 b b v v b b
b b b
b b v b b v b b b v b v b v b b b b b
Boiler houses and adjoining premises (power in excess of 70 kW) 51v/61b 07v/08b 21 21 20 20 50 20 07/08 07/08 07v/08b v 07v/08b v 08 07v/08b v
50v/60b 08
23 23 21 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21
08 07 08 02 02 02 02 02 02 07 07 b b b b b b b
b b
b b
20 20 20 20 20 20
07v/08b v 07 02 02 02 02/07 b b b b
D-74
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E43010
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Type of premises
Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
IP43/IK08
Farm premises or locations Alcohol (storage) Closed cattle sheds Laundries Wood storage rooms Threshing floors Distilling cellars Vat rooms (wine) Courtyards Poultry barns Stables Fertiliser (storage) Stables Manure heaps Haylofts Haystacks, forage (storage) Granaries, barns Straw (storage) Greenhouses Grain silos Milking rooms Pig sties Chicken houses Miscellaneous installations Fair facilities Water treatment facilities Height above ground from 0 to 1.10 m from 1.10 to 2 m above 2 m under evaporator or water drain pipe ceiling and up to 10 cm underneath Temperature y -10 C Compressor room
23 35 24 30 50 23 23 35 35 35 50 35 24 50 50 50 50 23 50 35 35 35 33 24/25 25 24 21
07 07 07 10 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 07/08 07 07 07 b
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
23 23 21
07 07 08 08 b
b b
400E43010
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-75
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Type of premises
Cubicle
Enclosure
with fixed frame with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
Min. IP/IK required IP IK Industrial facilities Slaughter houses Batteries (manufacture) Acid (manufacture and storage) Alcohol (manufacture and storage) Aluminium (manufacture and storage) Asphalt and bitumen storage Wool beating and carding Industrial laundry Wood (processing) Meat packers Bakeries Breweries Brickworks Rubber (production and processing) Carbide (manufacture and storage) Ammunition factories Carton board (production) Quarries Celluloid (manufacture of objects) Cellulose (manufacture) Coal (depots) Pork products Boiler-making works Lime kilns Rag (storage) Chlorine (manufacture and storage) Chrome-plating Cement works Coking plant Adhesives (production) Bottling lines Liquid fuels (storage) Fats (processing) Leather (tanning and storage) Copper (ore processing) Paint stripping Detergents (manufacture) Distilleries Electrolysis Ink manufacturing Explosives (manufacture and storage) Iron (production and processing) Spinning mills Furriers (beating process) Cheese factories Gas (production and storage) tar (processing) Seed production Metal engraving Oils (extraction) Petroleum products (manufacture) Printworks 55 33 33 33 51 08 07 07 07 08 07 07 08 07 08 07 07 07 08 07 07 08 07 08 08 08 08 07 08 08 07 07 07 08 08 07 08
IP30/IK07
IP43/IK08
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b
31v/33b 08 07 08 08 08 07 07 08 07 07 08 08 07 07 07 08 05 07 07 07 08
33v/34b 08
D-76
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E43010
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Type of premises
Cubicle
Enclosure
with fixed frame with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10
Min. IP/IK required IP IK Industrial establishments (continued) Dairies 25 07 Public wash-houses Liqueurs (production) Halogenated liquids (use) Inflammable products (storage and workshops where they are used) Magnesium (production, storage and use) Machine rooms Plastics (production) Cabinet makers Metals (processing) Combustion engines (testing of) Ammunition storage Nickel (or processing) Household waste (processing) Paper (production) Paper (storage) Perfume (production and storage) Pulp mill Paint (production and storage) Plaster (processing and storage) Gunpowder factory Chemicals (production) Oil refineries Salt preserve factories Soap (production) Saw mills Metalwork shops Grain or sugar silos Silk and artificial hair factories Sodium carbonate (processing and storage) Sulphur (processing) Spirits (storage) Sugar mills Tanners Dye works Textile and fabric (production) Varnish (production and application) Glass works Zinc works No applicable 25 21 21 21 31 20 51 50 30 33 33 54 31 31 34/35 33 50 55 34/35 33 31 50 30 50 50 33 51 33 55 35 35 51 33 33 31 07 07 08 08 08 08 08 08
IP30/IK07
IP43/IK08
b b b b b
b b b b v b b b b v b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
31v/33b 08 08 08 08 07 07 07 07 08 07 08 07 07 07 08 08 07 08 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 08 08 08
33v/34b 07
30v/50b 08
400E43010
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-77
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Schneider Electric enclosures comply with standard EN 50298 for empty enclosures. The sheet metal used for Schneider Electric enclosures receives an anti-corrosion epoxy electrophoresis treatment and a coating of a thermosetting, polyesterresinmodified epoxy powder for colour and appearance. This two-coat system provides excellent finish and corrosion protection. The characteristics of this coating are much better than those of traditional epoxy powders: b improved colour stability b wider operating temperature range.
D-78
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E43020
Additional information
Enclosure characteristics
Tests carried out at ambient temperature on phosphated test pieces coated with a 150 to 200 micron film.
Acids
Bases Water
Concentration 20 % 30 % 30 % 30 % 30 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 %
10
12
Solvents
400E43020
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-79
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards
Cooling There are a number of way to dissipate heat from the switchboard. The drawings below present the various means. Convection
Dd381484.eps Dd381483.eps Dd381482.eps
Forced-air ventilation
Dd381481.eps
IP > 31
IP y 31
IP y 54
IP y 54
Dd381920.eps
Dd381921.eps
IP > 31
For these extreme cases, many installers prefer to set up the switchboards with other electrotechnical and electronic devices in air-conditioned electrical rooms.
Heating The means employed to raise the internal temperature in a switchboard is a resistor-based heater, used to: bb avoid condensation by limiting variations in temperature bb ensure that the switchboard does not freeze.
D-80
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E45000
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Calculation of the internal temperature
Dd381401.eps
Comparative method A number of qualified and tested configurations serve as the basis for indicating the thermal capacity of Prisma P enclosures. This is en empirical means to check whether the dissipated power of the desired configuration is close to that of a tested configuration.
DD381350.eps
Method using charts taking into account enclosure characteristics To speed up calculations, Schneider Electric produces charts based on the companys experience and a number of assumptions on the installation. They can be used sufficiently precisely to determine the variations in temperature and the dissipated-power levels for the different types of wall-mounted enclosures, floor-standing enclosures and cubicles. For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see page D-83.
DD382422.eps
400E45000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-81
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm wide, 400 mm deep, IP30 Diversity factor: 0.7 and 0.8 Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 580 W Cubicle 2 : P(W) of device zone = 180 W
LGY
NSX250
Linergy FM
NSX400
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30 Diversity factor: 0.7 Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 880 W Cubicle 2 : P(W) of device zone = 330 W
DD385281.eps
Linergy LGY
NSX400
NSX630
NSX
NSX
NSX
NSX
D-82
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E45000
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30 Diversity factor: 0.7 Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 580 W Cubicle 2 : P(W) of device zone = 180 W
NSX250
NSX
NSX
NSX
NSX
NSX400
In the configuration below, the standardised diversity factor (K div.) for a total of 14 outgoing circuits is 0.6, i.e. 60 % of In for each outgoing circuit. Schneider Electric prefers a more conservative approach and therefore divides the installation into four main circuits: bb Compact NSX250 bb 200 A Linergy FM: 8 outgoers V K div. = 0.7 bb Linergy FC: 4 outgoers V K div. = 0.8 bb Compact NSX400. 1 Compact NSX250 + 1 Linergy FM 200 A + 1 Linergy FC + 1 Compact NSX400 V 4 outgoers, i.e. a diversity factor of 0.8. As a result, the current flowing in each circuit is at least 70 % and up to 80 % of In. Dissipated power of the NT1600 indicated by the manufacturer: 460 W. The power dissipated by the connections is approximately 30 % of the device P(W): 0.3 x 460 = 138 W. Power of circuit breaker + connections = 460 + 138 = 598 W at 1600 A. For I (the Watts are proportional to the square of the current) at 1410 A (In of the incoming device): 598 x 14102 = 405 W 16002 Dissipated power of the Compact NSX250 indicated by the manufacturer: 42 W. Dissipated power of the connections: 0.3 x 42 = 12.6 W. Power of circuit breaker + connections = 42 +12.6 = 54.6 W at 250 A. For 200 A (the tested value): 54.6 x 2002 = 35 W 2502 Dissipated power of the Linergy FC and its four Compact NSX250 circuit 4 x 35 W (same calculation as above) = 14 breakers: Sum of the dissipated power in the incoming cubicle: P(W) = 405 + 35 +140 = 580 W
400E45000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-83
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards
Draw a line parallel to the others on the chart and read the corresponding difference in temperature. For the given example, the heat rise is 22 C at mid-height in the enclosure. The internal temperature = external temperature + heat rise = 35 C + 22 C = 57 C 57 C < 60 C stipulated by the standard, i.e. the result is acceptable for an IP3 cubicle. This gives roughly: Internal temperature = 60 C at mid-height in the enclosure for a low IP value. Internal temperature = 70 C at mid-height in the enclosure for a high IP value.
D-84
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E45000
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Quick calculation charts for internal temperatures
DD382424.eps
For the enclosures not mentioned on the previous pages, use the equation: DT = P SxK
where: DT: internal temperature - external temperature P: power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts) S: total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m) K: thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m C)
DD382426.eps
K=5.5 W/m C for painted sheet metal. Note: the dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately 30 % to account for the connections and the busbars.
400E45000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-85
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Switchboard ventilation
P DT
- KS
The chart below can be used to determine the necessary throughput, based on the dissipated power, the difference in temperature (internal - external) and the exposed surface area of the enclosure. Example Consider an IP3X cubicle, 650 mm wide and 400 mm deep, containing components (devices, connections, busbars, etc.) dissipating 1000 W. The ambient temperature around the cubicle is 50 C. Given that the average temperature at mid-height should not exceed 60 C, the difference in temperature DT is equal to 60 - 50 = 10 C. The exposed surface of the cubicle (non adjacent to a wall or other cubicle) is 4.46m. (back = 1.3 m, front = 1.3 m, roof = 0.26 m, side panels = 1.6 m). What is the necessary throughput of the ventilation system? The throughput can be calculated as: D = 3.1 x
D = 234 m3/h. In the range of Prisma P accessories, select a system with a throughput of 300 m3/h.
Dd381391.eps
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts) Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts) Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C) Ti : average internal temperature (in C) Te : average external temperature (in C) DTm = Tm Te DT = Ti Te S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m2) K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m2 C) K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal D: ventilation throughput (in m3/h) Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.
Calculation data
D-86
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E45000
Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Switchboard heating
Chart to determine the heating resistor for all types of enclosures and cubicles
Dd381789.eps
Calculation data P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts) Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts) Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C) Ti : average internal temperature (in C) Te : average external temperature (in C) DTm = Tm Te DT = Ti Te S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m2) K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m2 C) K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal D: ventilation throughput (in m3/h).
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately 30 % to account for the connections and the busbars.
400E45000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-87
Additional information
Practical information
bb Vacuum cleaner to clean the switchboards bb Ratchet wrench with sockets bb Torque wrench with sockets and ring bits to tighten the electrical connections to the correct torque (max. torque 50 Nm) bb Open-ended torque wrench bb Open-ended spanners (15 to 27 mm). bb Electrician's knife bb 7, 8, 10, 13, 16, 17 and 19 mm sockets bb Bit holder socket bb 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm hexagonal-head bits bb Pozidriv no. 1, 2 and 3 bits bb Rubber mallet bb Level. bb Measurement and inspection tools and instruments bb Drill bb Semi-circuit nosed pliers bb Cable-tie pliers bb Wire stripper bb Crimping tool bb Diagonal cutter bb Wire cutters bb Flat-nosed pliers bb Bit holder for screwdriver bb Extension bb Electric saw bb Jig saw bb Clamp for cubicle alignment bb Buzzer or tester bb 3, 5, 4, 5.5 and 8 mm flat screwdrivers bb Posidriv no. 2 crosshead screwdriver (to mount handle) bb Hydraulic jacks that can be operated in horizontal position to lift cubicles and move them sideways if necessary. bb Coloured, indelible and temperature resistant acrylic varnish. bb Electric screwdriver
Note: a Facom brand torque wrench is available with a capacity of 75 Nm and a thin shape. It is recommended for tightening under difficult access conditions.
DD383904.eps
Part numbers: bb SP3723 = wrench handle (essential) bb SP3721 = extra-flat ratchet adapter (essential) bb SP3722 = ratchet for ordinary sockets (optional) for mounting on handle SP3723 bb SP2709 = extra-flat 13 mm short socket bb SP2709A = extra-flat 13 mm long socket bb SP4369 = extra-flat 16 mm short socket bb SP4370 = extra-flat 16 mm long socket bb SP2710 = extra-flat 17 mm short socket bb SP4371 = extra-flat 19 mm short socket bb SP4372 = extra-flat 19 mm long socket.
D-88
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the circuit breaker. The size of cables must be selected according to: bb the level of current bb the ambient temperature around the conductors bb the degree of protection of the switchboard. The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device (permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.). They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with cover panels rated IP y 55: bb switchboard internal temperature is 60 C bb connections using copper cables.
Devices
NSX100
NSX160
NSX250
25 50 95 Note: Schneider Electric recommends connecting Compact NSX400/630 circuit breakers with insulated flexible bars or rigid bars, see page D-44.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-89
Additional information
Practical information
Connection accessories
Maximum size of lugs for connection to the different incoming connection blocks.
Standard Cu lugs Narrow Cu lugs Bimetal narrow lugs
Incoming connection block for Compact NSX-INS250 supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04066 or 04067 In-duct incoming connection block for Compact NSX630 supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04076
150 mm 240 mm
240 mm 300 mm
185 mm 300 mm
DD382788.eps
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Maximum size and number of cables for connection to terminal extension bars (as per busbar drawing supplied) for customer connection of Compact NSX and Masterpact NT/NW devices.
Max. size (mm) Quantity
D-90
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Protective circuits
The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.: bb for copper single-phase circuits or circuits with conductors sized y 16mm, the PEN conductor must be the same size as the phase conductors bb for copper three-phase circuits with conductors sized > 16 mm, it can be: vv the same size as the phase conductors vv smaller on the condition that: - the current likely to flow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the permissible current for the conductor - the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10 % of the total rating. The PEN conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.
According to standard IEC 60439-1, the practical guidelines for implementing the PEN are the following: bb at the head of the assembly, the PEN connection must be near the phase connections bb within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fire or explosion) bb the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral bb the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars the change from the TNC to the TNS system must take place at a single place in the switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop bb after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system. The PE and the neutral must meet their individual constraints.
DD384616.eps
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-91
Additional information
Practical information
Protective circuits
The protective conductor must be sufficiently sized and securely installed in the switchboard to accept the thermal and electrodynamic constraints of the fault current. It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard. It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site.
SPE: cross-sectional area of the PE in mm I: value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phase-tophase fault current (IEC 60439-1 8.2.4.2) t: time the fault current flows in seconds k: coefficient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor with PVC insulation. Simplified method (based on the equation above) Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of device short-circuit current Isc.
Size of PE conductor Isc y 40 kA Isc y 65 kA Isc > 65 kA All Schneider Electric devices 1 Linergy BS bar, 25 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 800
Schneider Electric prefabricated solution For Schneider Electric devices up to Isc values of 85 kA, see page B-82 .
D-92
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars (Linergy LGY or Linergy BS) in two ways: bb in a duct (by a direct connection ordered from the catalogue) bb in the rear (with part of the connection to be fabricated by the installer). 5 mm thick horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars using connection plate 04634 (y 1000 A) or 04635 (> 1000 A) after drilling holes in the horizontal bars. 10 mm thick horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars in 2 ways: bb using connection plate 04636 (y 1600 A) or 04637 (> 1600 A) without drilling holes in the horizontal bars bb or with a screw and socket assembly (04645) designed for assembly on a busbar that has already been mounted.
Connection plate (cat. no. 04635).
DD383907.eps DD383948.eps DD383906.eps
This bolted solution requires: bb holes drilled in the bars (16 mm) for diagonal mounting of the sockets and screws bb conformity with the following mounting rules: vv respect the overlap length (2.5 to 5 times the bar thickness) vv tighten to a torque of 50 Nm vv fit the recommended number of screws, depending on the bar width as explained below.
DD383908.eps
In practice, the real contact area is limited to regions in which the pressure is applied effectively. In a bolted overlap assembly, these areas are made up of the areas adjacent to the bolts, and more precisely under the washers. Salt spray tests have demonstrated these contact areas. The number of screws thus determines the effective cross-sectional area through which the current flows, which corresponds to the area under the washer (minus the screw hole). This cross-section area must be close to that of the bar. Controlled temperature rise Whatever the connection solution used, the quality and reliability of the contact is guaranteed, in particular with respect to temperature rise, as long as assembly is carried out according to our recommendations.
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-93
Additional information
Practical information
The current transformers can be installed either on the main busbars or on the circuits upstream or downstream of devices. Installation must not affect the insulation level or the reliability of the busbars. Choice of a CT model depends on the type of installation: bb insulated cables bb Prisma P vertical busbars bb insulated flexible busbars bb Linergy LGY vertical busbars bb rigid busbars. When installing a CT, we recommend that you comply with the following mounting rules: bb install current transformers: vv on an easily dismountable busbars or copper connections vv between 2 connection points, by joints or bolted connection bb place the current transformer so that the identification markings remain readable. For large current transformers, a staggered installation is recommended to prevent arcing on fixing screws or excessive spacing between phase conductors. If they are installed on vertical busbars, secure the current transformers in place to prevent them from slipping downwards (for example using a bolt or a pin) bb when there are several busbars per phase, fit spacers between the busbars in order to: vv resist the tightening forces when installing the current transformer vv avoid vibrations that lead to current transformer breakdowns.
PD391279.eps
CT on vertical busbars.
D-94
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Our circuit breakers have trip units with a built-in ammeter (see Micrologic catalogue). Their use eliminates the need for installing a CT on the busbars.
DD383909.eps
The CT casing is a solution for installation of CTs up to 1600 A. CTs can be installed in the casing (cat. no. 03506). It is equipped with a frame made up of 2 uprights, adjustable in depth and 2 slotted cross-members to fix the cables, install CTs or install a busbar support with 75 mm spacing. It is secured in the switchgear compartment of a 400 or 600 mm deep cubicle. The 300 mm duct allows easier mounting of CTs. To install 2 CTs, downstream from a circuit-breaker for example, it is often easier to use a 300 mm wide duct (cat. no. 08403 for 400 mm depth or cat. no. 08603 for 600 mm depth).
PD391282.eps
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-95
Additional information
Practical information
PD391283.eps
For each source changeover configuration, various combinations of normal and replacement source circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are possible: bb 1 normal source/1 replacement source: v NS630b to NS1600 / NS630b to NS1600 v NT / NT v NT / NW v NW / NT v NW / NW bb 2 normal sources with coupling: vv NW / NW / NW vv NT / NT / NT vv NW / NW / NW bb 2 normal sources + 1 replacement source with coupling: NW / NW / NW / NW or NT. Tables in the catalogue indicate the possible combinations normal and replacement devices according to the rating as well as the types of interlocking available for the different types of devices.
DD381617.eps
PD391284.eps
Highly economical vertical configurations are possible even for the largest devices. In this case, interlocking may be: b mechanical by cable + motor mechanism b via rotary handles (for NS630b/1600 only). To define the number of modules required to install superimposed devices, all you have to do is add up the number of modules required for each device with: b its connections b its cover and its partitioning. For combination possibilities and installation details, refer to the Compact and Masterpact source changeover systems catalogue ABTED201149EN or ABTED201149FR.
D-96
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
DD383910.eps
DD210441.eps
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-97
Additional information
Practical information
Storage recommendations
Cubicles must be stored in upright position in a dry and ventilated location, sheltered from rain, weather, dripping and running water, dust and chemical agents. Apart from IP55 cubicles, never store enclosures outdoors, even under an awning or tarp. The cubicles should if possible be left in their packing until they are installed. In this way they are protected against all risks that may be encountered on the site (impacts, splashes, etc.). Acceptable storage temperatures are -25 C to +55 C (or up to +70 C for short periods not exceeding 24 hours). Given their heavy weight, cubicles should be stored on a stable, rigid and flat floor to avoid any risk of tipping during storage or handling.
D-98
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Packing information
Standard packing
The cubicles are protected by a plastic cover in a crate. The following accessories are attached inside the switchboard: bb installation accessories (lifting/fixing cross-members and external fixing lugs) bb preliminary installation accessories: plinth raisers bb horizontal busbar joints (if required) bb additional nuts and bolts and other mounting hardware bb panels to be fitted after on-site connection: canopies, roof panels, gland plates bb a set of drawings bb device user manuals bb a tube of Swiss white varnish. Large withdrawable or drawout circuit breakers installed at the top of the cubicle (Masterpact and Compact NS) are generally delivered separately.
DD383912.eps
Sea packing
The cubicles are protected by a heat-sealed plastic cover containing desiccant bags and are installed in a ventilated wooden or plywood crate. As a rule sea crates do not weigh more than 5 tons.
Sorting
In order to sort the different types of packing material, specific waste recovery bins are required.
DD383913.eps
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-99
Additional information
Practical information
DD383914.eps
Final unpacking of the equipment will preferably take place just before the switchboard is installed, as close as possible to its final installation location. As a general guideline, the weight of an average 3200 A cubicle is around 400 kg. Cubicles should always be handled in the upright position with care, if possible by 2 persons. There is a risk of overtipping the cubicle due to the high position of the centre of gravity. When moving the cubicles, always turn slowly and smoothly, avoiding all bumps and jerks. Enclosures moved using a forklift truck must be lifted carefully and held in position or fastened to the forklift truck using slings during transport.
NX 08
Ue 690(V)
HA10 12kV
Uimp
Ui 1000V
50kA/1s
50/60Hz AS 947-2 UNE IEC BS CEI EN 60947-2 VDE UTE NBMA
II masterpact
GERIN
MERLIN
NX 08
Ue 690(V)
HA10 12kV
Uimp
Ui 1000V
50kA/1s
50/60Hz AS 947-2 UNE IEC BS CEI EN 60947-2 VDE UTE NBMA
II masterpact
GERIN
MERLIN
Wooden beams (or framework stabilizers) are generally attached to the base of the cubicle framework. This allows the cubicles to be moved using a pallet mover or forklift truck. The forks must be placed symmetrically with respect to the cubicle's axis so as not to distort the base of the frame.
Dd381333.eps
For cubicles fitted with a plinth, the front and rear base panels must be removed to allow insertion of the pallet mover forks. Cubicles must be lifted with care and held in place during transport by strapping them onto the handling machine, especially for large distances or bumpy terrain.
Framework stabiliser.
For a Prisma P switchboard with a busbar compartment, lifting points must be shifted towards the busbars.
DD210573.eps
D-100
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Dd381541.eps
If cranes or overhead hoists are used, only slings that are sufficiently strong and in good condition should be used. b The slings must be attached to the 4 cubicle lifting lugs. b Adjust the length of the slings according to the switchboard dimensions so that the angle formed does not exceed the angle indicated below depending on the switchboard weight. When 2 switchgear cubicles are combined, a lifting beam must be used. b Never tilt the cubicle during handling. b Take care to equally distribute the load on the 4 rings.
DD383915.eps
DD210574.eps
The lifting rings can be installed and removed without dismantling the roof. Even with the lifting rings permanently installed, the switchboard retains its original degree of protection. For combined cubicles, only install lifting rings on cubicles with switchgear.
DD383379.eps
b Lifting several cubicles packed together In the special case of an assembly with more than 2 cubicles, you must: bb first of all move the assembly in its original packing as close as possible to where it is to be installed bb use a lifting beam and slings to support the switchboard from underneath.
DD383916.eps
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-101
Additional information
Practical information
Transport
The cubicles must be loaded vertically (stacking strongly discouraged). After loading, check that the equipment is firmly secured in the truck to avoid any risk of damage during transport.
DD383917.eps
D-102
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Cubicle handling and rolling base Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles
This type of base is designed to increase the rigidity of cubicle frameworks to avoid any risk of deformation during transport and handling. Five different catalogue numbers offer 27 width possibilities (1200 to 3050 mm) for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles. b Two catalogue numbers each include 2 end-pieces for handling bases for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. b Three catalogue numbers each include 2 lengths for the sides of handling bases for 1200 to 3050 mm wide cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. Handling bases can be used for both side-by-side and back-to-back cubicle combinations. In this case, the mounting hardware for one of the sets is used. Designation
2 cubicle handling base end-pieces 2 cubicle handling base side-lengths D = 400 mm D = 600 mm W = 1200 to 1900 mm W = 2000 to 2550 mm W = 2650 to 3050 mm
50 mm high base
DD383845.eps
50
08714 + 08705.
DD383849.eps
Cat. no.
08714 08716 08705 08706 08707
Combined cubicles equipped with a handling base can be moved easily and safely on rollers.
DD380652.eps
08716
08705
DD383840.eps
b Kit 08722 is recommended for lifting combined cubicles and can be used together with handling base end-pieces 08714 for severe transport or handling conditions. bb Catalogue number 08722 includes 3 reinforcement brackets for 400 or 600 mm deep cubicles and the corresponding mounting hardware. Designation
Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles W = 400/600 mm
Cat. no.
08722
DD383839.eps
08722
08722
08722
650
400
800
800
800
300
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-103
Additional information
Practical information
Prisma P switchboards come equipped with a special interface that allows them to be directly connected to Canalis KT trunking. The electrical connection between the Canalis KT trunking and the Prisma P switchboard is just as easy to carry out as jointing between two busbar trunking sections. The Canalis KT interface is totally integrated in the Prisma P switchboard volume. It comprises a Canalis KT joint block and interface/circuit breaker connection terminals.
DD383919.eps
bb Dismantle the roof. bb Cut out a passage for the busbar trunking. bb Adjust the guides according to the KT width that will be connected. bb Unscrew the junction block screws. bb Ensure that the busbar trunking length to be connected to the switchboard is correctly supported and that it is not resting on the interface. bb Lower the element until it is in contact with the interface frame, without bearing on it. bb Tighten the junction torque nuts. When the head breaks, the torque of 60 Nm has bb been reached.
In certain cases, it is recommended to only tighten the 2 middle nuts to 60 Nm and the 2 outer nuts to 10 Nm. bb A red plastic washer that is ejected when the head breaks provides visual evidence that the joint tightening operation has been carried out correctly. bb For dismantling or maintenance operations, a second head is available on the nut and can be retightened using a conventional torque wrench. The recommended tightening torque is then 60 Nm. bb Reassemble the roof.
Sealing kit
bb In order to retain the original IP index, use the roof sealing kit ordered with the busbar trunking. This kit guarantees an IP52 degree of protection at the trunking passage. bb The kit is installed by cutting out the roof of the Prisma P switchboard. This cut-out, which is the same dimension for all Canalis KT busbar trunking ratings, is made using the template delivered with the sealing kit.
D-104
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
To ensure protection of persons, first connect the switchboard protective conductor to the earth electrode. bb Tie the cables as close as possible to the connections to avoid any mechanical stresses on the device terminals. When not using cable glands, also attach the cables near to the cubicle entry point. bb Cables must never be in contact with or passed between live conductors. bb Sharp edges of the framework must be protected where cables pass to avoid bb damaging the conductors. bb Comply with a minimum radius of curvature of 6 to 8 times the cable outside bb diameter. bb All power connections must be made with class 8.8 mounting hardware and bb elastic contact washers, tightened to the torque indicated in the table below. bb When connecting aluminium cables to copper terminals, use bimetal lugs or bb interfaces. bb Separate the different types of circuits into separate cable bundles (power, control, bb 48 V, 24 V, DC, AC, etc). Cable bundles
Cable cross-sectional area (mm ) CSA y 10 16 < CSA y 50 CSA u 50 Max. number of cables per bundle 8 4 Tie individually
For cable sizes of 50 mm or more, use 9 mm wide fixing ties. Recommended tightening torque for mechanical and electrical connections with 8.8 class screws.
Diameter of screw M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 Tightening torque (Nm) (with nut + contact washer) 1,5 3,5 7 13 28 50 75
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-105
Additional information
Practical information
DD383380.eps
bb Remove the roof. bb Drill the holes required to install cable glands or grommets. bb Install the cable glands or grommets. They must comply with the switchboards degree of protection (IP). bb Refit the roof. bb Run the cables through the glands or grommets. bb Run the cables in the intended compartments and secure them to cable tie-bars every 400 mm. bb Crimp the lugs and connect. bb When sealing does not call for cable glands or when sealing is achieved by means of foam, cables can be routed in a rectangular cut-out in the roof. The removable cross-member simplifies insertion of cables in the cubicle.
DD210587.eps
DD383377.eps
D-106
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
400E41000
Additional information
Practical information
Dd380794.eps
bb Check that the circuit and switchgear identification indications match. bb When connections are made to terminal extensions made up of several bars for each phase, position the lugs opposite one another and insert copper spacers between the bars. bb Comply with the minimum required electrical clearances between phases of 14 mm (conforming with IEC 60439-1). bb Mark all nuts and the terminal extension bars with a dot of varnish after tightening to the defined torque. bb Remove the top cross-member of the cubicle to simplify connection of the cables to the bars. bb Tie cables of the same phase together. bb When connections are made directly to the switchgear terminals, comply with the tightening torque recommended by the device manufacturer. bb Check that the length of the screws delivered with the switchgear is compatible with the lug thickness. bb Comply with the safety clearances around the switchgear devices, defined by the manufacturer to ensure correct operation. bb Refit the interphase barriers and terminal shields if applicable after connection the power cables. bb For the special case of connection with armoured cable, please consult us.
400E41000
Version : 3.0
16/04/2013
D-107
04-2013